Two hundred and twenty-seven verses. Meccan. One of the sūras with the highest verse count in the Qurʾān — it comes after al-Baqara, al-Aʿrāf and Āl ʿImrān. But a large number of verses is not a large bulk: the verses of al-Shuʿarāʾ are short, most of them a single sentence, some of them three words (wa jannātin wa ʿuyūn, 134). The sūra takes its length not from the length of its sentences but from their number.
It takes its name from a word in verse 224: ٱلشُّعَرَآء — al-shuʿarāʾ, "the poets". This word occurs in the last five verses of the sūra and nowhere else in the whole of it. The sūra therefore takes its name from its own final paragraph — as al-Baqara takes its name from verses 67-73 and al-Naml from verse 18. This is the ordinary situation in the naming of the sūras of the Qurʾān: the name is not a summary of the subject but a distinctive word that occurs in the sūra.
Seven prophets are recounted — Moses (Mūsā), Abraham (Ibrāhīm), Noah (Nūḥ), Hūd, Ṣāliḥ, Lot (Lūṭ), Shuʿayb — and all seven are set into the same mould. Five of them open with the same sentence, eight of them (counting the opening section) close with the same two-verse seal, and within them the same two sentences are repeated eight times and five times. These repetitions are not the ornament of the sūra but its skeleton — and because they can be counted, they will be tabulated in a separate section of this commentary.
1. Do not grieve (3) — that the addressee does not believe is not a failure of the messenger. 2. It was like this before you too (10-191) — seven accounts, seven times the same outcome. 3. This speech is not your invention (192-227) — its source, its language, the place it came down, and whose speech it is not.
And the end of the third section attaches to the beginning of the first: the sūra opens "perhaps you will destroy yourself" (3) and closes "those who did wrong will soon know to what place of return they will return" (227). The sūra thus begins by telling the messenger "this is not your business" and ends by saying "God will give the outcome".
The block boundaries of the sūra are not disputed, because the text itself draws them. Every block ends with the same two verses.
| Block | Verses | Subject | What ends the block |
|---|---|---|---|
| I | 1-9 | The Book, consolation for the messenger, the possibility of compulsion, the proof from plants | 8-9 — the seal |
| II | 10-68 | Moses — the call, Pharaoh, the sorcerers, the parting of the sea | 67-68 — the seal |
| III | 69-104 | Abraham — the idols, the five-sentence sequence, the prayer, the scene of the gathering | 103-104 — the seal |
| IV | 105-122 | Noah — "the lowest of the people have followed you" | 121-122 — the seal |
| V | 123-140 | Hūd — monuments on the hills, fortresses, seizing like tyrants | 139-140 — the seal |
| VI | 141-159 | Ṣāliḥ — "will you be left secure here?", the she-camel | 158-159 — the seal |
| VII | 160-175 | Lot — "the males of all the worlds?" | 174-175 — the seal |
| VIII | 176-191 | Shuʿayb — measure, weight, not shortchanging people in their goods | 190-191 — the seal |
| IX | 192-213 | The source of the Qurʾān: who sent it down, in what language, who did not send it down | 213 — fa-lā tadʿu |
| X | 214-227 | Commands to the messenger and the section on the poets | 227 — munqalabin yanqalibūn |
All eight of the eight blocks end with the same two verses. This is an order not found at this density in any other sūra of the Qurʾān. Al-Ṣāffāt too had a sequence of prophets and a closing seal (al-Ṣāffāt) — but there the seal was in four pieces and was not stamped in full on everyone. In al-Shuʿarāʾ the seal is two verses and is exactly the same eight times. A comparison of the two sūras is given below in a separate table.
All two hundred and twenty-seven verses of the sūra end with a nasal letter (nūn or mīm) following a long vowel. There are two dominant patterns: ‑īna (muʾminīn, ʿālamīn, ṣādiqīn) and ‑ūna (yaʿlamūn, yafʿalūn, yahīmūn); the minority that comes between them ends in ‑īm (al-raḥīm, ʿaẓīm, ʿalīm, ḥamīm).
| Verse-ending | Example | Where it is dense |
|---|---|---|
| ‑īna | muʾminīn (8), al-ʿālamīn (109), al-mursalīn (105) | The whole sūra |
| ‑ūna | taʿbudūn (70), yahīmūn (225), yafʿalūn (226) | In the speech sections |
| ‑īm(i) | al-raḥīm (9, 68, 104, 122, 140, 159, 175, 191), ʿaẓīm (135, 156, 189), ʿalīm (220) | The second verse of the seal |
What is worth recording is this: the second verse of the seal (wa inna rabbaka la-huwa'l-ʿazīzu'r-raḥīm) departs from the dominant sound of the sūra — it ends not in ‑īn but in ‑īm. Eight blocks undergo the same change of sound at the same place eight times. The seal is therefore stamped not only with a word but with a sound: the reader hears that the block has ended.
I record this as a fact; I do not enter into any reckoning of letters or numbers — that road is closed in this commentary (al-Baqara). What is recorded is an observation about sound of the same kind as those recorded in the sections on al-Qalam and al-Ṣāffāt (al-Qalam, al-Ṣāffāt).
On the sūra's being Meccan there is something close to unanimity. Some sources transmit that the final verses (224-227, or 227 alone) are Medinan; the ground given is that the expression wa'ntaṣarū min baʿdi mā ẓulimū ("and they defended themselves after being wronged") in verse 227 points to the permission to defend oneself. This is a transmitted view; I adopt no firm preference.
The sūra as a whole sits inside the central dispute at Mecca and answers three of the claims made in it:
| Claim | The sūra's answer | Where |
|---|---|---|
| "This man is possessed / a poet" | What poets do is described; the conduct described is not the conduct of the messenger | 224-226 |
| "The satans are bringing this to him" | Wa mā tanazzalat bihi'sh-shayāṭīn — whom they do come down upon is stated | 210-212, 221-223 |
| "Let a miracle come to us and we will believe" | In nashaʾ nunazzil ʿalayhim mina's-samāʾi āyatan — what would happen if one came is stated | 4 |
Every table in this section is a count of the text. It is not interpretation; where something is interpretation it is marked as such.
From verse 10 to verse 191 of the sūra — that is, one hundred and eighty-two verses — seven prophetic accounts are recounted. Four of the accounts sit inside a shared frame:
1. The notice of denial: Kadhdhabat … al-mursalīn 2. The opening: Idh qāla lahum akhūhum … alā tattaqūn 3. The threefold introduction: innī lakum rasūlun amīn · fa'ttaqū'llāha wa aṭīʿūn · wa mā asʾalukum ʿalayhi min ajrin… 4. The closing seal: inna fī dhālika la-āyatan… · wa inna rabbaka la-huwa'l-ʿazīzu'r-raḥīm
And all four elements of the frame are missing in the accounts of Moses and Abraham. This is the most striking structural datum in the sūra, and it will be treated separately below.
إِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ لَءَايَةً ۖ وَمَا كَانَ أَكْثَرُهُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ · وَإِنَّ رَبَّكَ لَهُوَ ٱلْعَزِيزُ ٱلرَّحِيمُ Inna fī dhālika la-āyatan wa mā kāna aktharuhum muʾminīn · Wa inna rabbaka la-huwa'l-ʿazīzu'r-raḥīm "In this there is surely a sign; but most of them were not believers. · And your Lord — He indeed — is the Mighty, the Merciful."
| # | Verses | Which block it closes | Is there an addition before the seal |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 8-9 | The opening (1-9) | none |
| 2 | 67-68 | Moses (10-68) | none |
| 3 | 103-104 | Abraham (69-104) | none |
| 4 | 121-122 | Noah (105-122) | none |
| 5 | 139-140 | Hūd (123-140) | yes — fa-kadhdhabūhu fa-ahlaknāhum |
| 6 | 158-159 | Ṣāliḥ (141-159) | yes — fa-akhadhahumu'l-ʿadhāb |
| 7 | 174-175 | Lot (160-175) | none |
| 8 | 190-191 | Shuʿayb (176-191) | none |
Six of the eight occurrences are bare; in two of them (Hūd and Ṣāliḥ) a short sentence announcing destruction has been added at the head of the first verse of the seal. This is a difference that can be verified from the text.
The reason is not stated in the text. I record an observation as my own reading, and it is not binding: in the accounts of Noah (119-120), Lot (170-173) and Shuʿayb (189) the destruction has already been recounted in the verses before the seal; in the accounts of Hūd and Ṣāliḥ it has not — the account of Hūd ends with the people's words "we are not going to be punished" (138), and the account of Ṣāliḥ with "they became regretful" (157). The addition at the head of the seal therefore looks as though it is completing information that was left missing. This is an explanation, not a ruling.
| Prophet | Notice of denial | Verb | Is akhūhum present | alā tattaqūn |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Moses | none | — | none | 11 — alā yattaqūn (third person) |
| Abraham | none | — | none | none |
| Noah | 105 — kadhdhabat qawmu Nūḥin | كَذَّبَتْ (feminine) | 106 — akhūhum Nūḥ ✔ | 106 ✔ |
| Hūd | 123 — kadhdhabat ʿĀdun | كَذَّبَتْ (feminine) | 124 — akhūhum Hūd ✔ | 124 ✔ |
| Ṣāliḥ | 141 — kadhdhabat Thamūdu | كَذَّبَتْ (feminine) | 142 — akhūhum Ṣāliḥ ✔ | 142 ✔ |
| Lot | 160 — kadhdhabat qawmu Lūṭin | كَذَّبَتْ (feminine) | 161 — akhūhum Lūṭ ✔ | 161 ✔ |
| Shuʿayb | 176 — kadhdhaba aṣḥābu'l-Aykati | كَذَّبَ (masculine) | 177 — none | 177 ✔ |
One — in the accounts of Moses and Abraham there is no opening mould. Both begin with a different sentence: Moses with wa idh nādā rabbuka Mūsā (10), Abraham with wa'tlu ʿalayhim nabaʾa Ibrāhīm (69). Neither begins with "the people denied".
Two — in the account of Moses the sentence alā tattaqūn is present, but its person has changed. In verse eleven: qawma Firʿawn; alā yattaqūn — "[go] to the people of Pharaoh; will they not guard themselves?" The sentence is therefore spoken not by the prophet to those he addresses, but by God to the prophet, and those addressed become the third person. In the other five accounts the same sentence is in the form tattaqūn (you), and it is the prophet's own speech.
Three — in the account of Shuʿayb there is no akhūhum ("their brother"). In four of the five accounts the prophet is named as the "brother" of his people; with Shuʿayb this drops away and only idh qāla lahum Shuʿaybun is said. The reason appears in how those addressed are named: in the other four they are named by a lineage (qawmu Nūḥ, ʿĀd, Thamūd, qawmu Lūṭ); here by a place: aṣḥābu'l-Ayka — "the people of al-Ayka", that is, those who dwell in the dense thicket. One is the brother of a lineage; one is not called the brother of the people of a place.
And the same difference is reflected in the verb as well: because the words qawm, ʿĀd and Thamūd can be treated as feminine in Arabic, the verb is kadhdhabat; because aṣḥāb is a masculine plural, the verb is kadhdhaba. The two differences in verse 176 — the dropped akhūhum and the changed verb — can therefore be traced to the same cause. I record this as an observation about the structure.
| Sentence | Noah | Hūd | Ṣāliḥ | Lot | Shuʿayb | Moses | Abraham |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Innī lakum rasūlun amīn | 107 | 125 | 143 | 162 | 178 | none | none |
| Fa'ttaqū'llāha wa aṭīʿūn | 108 | 126 | 144 | 163 | 179 | none | none |
| Wa mā asʾalukum ʿalayhi min ajrin… | 109 | 127 | 145 | 164 | 180 | none | none |
In all five of the five accounts these three sentences come immediately after the opening verse and in the same order. The first four verses of each account (denial + opening + threefold introduction) are thus identical with one another; the accounts diverge from the fifth verse onward.
This is the most easily verifiable structural datum in the sūra: the ranges 105-109, 123-127, 141-145, 160-164 and 176-180 — five blocks of five verses — are the same but for a single word (the name of the prophet). With Shuʿayb one further word drops (akhūhum).
The sentence occurs once inside the introductory mould in each of the five accounts; in three accounts it is repeated once more.
| Prophet | First occurrence (introductory mould) | Second occurrence | What lies between |
|---|---|---|---|
| Noah | 108 | 110 | 109 — that he asks no wage |
| Hūd | 126 | 131 | 128-130 — three offences: the monument, the fortress, seizing like tyrants |
| Ṣāliḥ | 144 | 150 | 146-149 — the favours and the carving of houses out of mountains |
| Lot | 163 | none | — |
| Shuʿayb | 179 | none | — |
What is worth recording is what precedes the second occurrence. With Noah a single verse comes between. With Hūd and Ṣāliḥ what comes between is a list enumerating the deeds of the people — and when the list ends the same sentence is repeated. The sentence therefore frames the list: "guard yourselves against God and obey me → [you are doing these things] → guard yourselves against God and obey me."
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the position of the sentence in the three accounts. In the accounts of Lot and Shuʿayb there is no repetition; there the list of offences is attached directly to the call itself (165-166 and 181-183), and no distance comes between that would require framing.
وَمَآ أَسْـَٔلُكُمْ عَلَيْهِ مِنْ أَجْرٍ ۖ إِنْ أَجْرِىَ إِلَّا عَلَىٰ رَبِّ ٱلْعَٰلَمِينَ "I ask you no wage for it; my wage falls only upon the Lord of all the worlds."
All five are exactly the same — there is not a letter of difference. The Qurʾān has counterparts of this sentence in other sūras as well (Hūd 11/29, 11/51; Sabaʾ 34/47; Yā Sīn 36/21 — ittabiʿū man lā yasʾalukum ajran). What is distinctive in al-Shuʿarāʾ is that the sentence is repeated five times in the same sūra and in the same position.
The function of this sentence is visible across the whole sūra: the sūra describes what the messenger is and what he is not. A man who asks no wage cannot be explained by interest. And at the end of the sūra, describing the poets, it will say "they say what they do not do" (226) — the fit between speech and conduct is thus the measure of the sūra from beginning to end. I record this as an observation about the context.
The same structure was treated in al-Ṣāffāt, and the frame set out there is not repeated here. The comparison of the two sūras is this:
| Al-Ṣāffāt 37/75-148 | Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/10-191 | |
|---|---|---|
| How many prophets | 6 (Noah, Abraham, Moses-Aaron, Elijah, Lot, Jonah) | 7 (Moses, Abraham, Noah, Hūd, Ṣāliḥ, Lot, Shuʿayb) |
| How many pieces to the seal | 4 sentences (taraknā · salām · najzi'l-muḥsinīn · min ʿibādina'l-muʾminīn) | 2 verses |
| Is the seal stamped on everyone | No — with Lot and Jonah there is not one piece | Yes — eight out of eight |
| The opening mould | Three separate forms + three occurrences of wa inna … la-mina'l-mursalīn | Kadhdhabat … al-mursalīn + idh qāla lahum akhūhum |
| Prophets in common | Noah, Abraham, Moses, Lot | Noah, Abraham, Moses, Lot |
| Only there | Elijah, Jonah, Isaac | Hūd, Ṣāliḥ, Shuʿayb |
| The content of the seal | Praise — peace and recompense | Outcome — "most did not believe" |
The two sūras use the same technique for two different ends. The seal of al-Ṣāffāt looks toward the prophet: peace is given to him, recompense is promised to him. The seal of al-Shuʿarāʾ looks toward the people: wa mā kāna aktharuhum muʾminīn — "most of them did not believe".
And this difference separates what the two sūras say to the one addressed. I record it as my own reading: al-Ṣāffāt says "the same recompense will be given to you"; al-Shuʿarāʾ says "the same answer will be given to you". The third verse of al-Shuʿarāʾ (laʿallaka bākhiʿun nafsaka) supports this reading — the sūra opens with the grief of the messenger.
And the three prophets found only in al-Shuʿarāʾ (Hūd, Ṣāliḥ, Shuʿayb) belong to the Arabian peninsula's own history. ʿĀd, Thamūd and Midian/al-Ayka are names known in the geography of those addressed. The sequence of al-Ṣāffāt, by contrast, is built out of names from the tradition of the Children of Israel. This is a difference that can be read off the text; I issue no ruling.
طسٓمٓ · تِلْكَ ءَايَٰتُ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ ٱلْمُبِينِ
The question has been set out many times across the series (al-Baqara, Yāsīn, Ṣād, Qāf, al-Qalam) and is not repeated. Its summary: no certain knowledge about the meaning of these letters has been transmitted; the most honest position is to say that it is not known.
The only thing to be added here is a datum from the text: the letters ṭā-sīn-mīm occur in the Qurʾān at the head of two sūras — al-Shuʿarāʾ (26) and al-Qaṣaṣ (28). Sūrat al-Naml, which lies between them, begins with ṭā-sīn. Three consecutive sūras — 26, 27, 28 — thus open with the same family of letters, and all three recount the account of Moses. This is an overlap that can be counted.
The opening of al-Qaṣaṣ was treated in this commentary (al-Qaṣaṣ 28/1-6), and the same note was entered there.
تِلْكَ — feminine, the demonstrative pronoun used for the distant ("that", "there it is"). For the near one would say hādhihi.
A point of word order worth recording: the verses are in the hand of the one addressed, they are being recited — that is, they are near. Yet the distant demonstrative is used. The Arabic grammarians explain this usage as exaltation (taʿẓīm): the pronoun that points to the distant announces the elevated rank of what is pointed to.
The same opening is repeated in several sūras of the Qurʾān: tilka āyātu'l-kitābi'l-ḥakīm (Yūnus 10/1), tilka āyātu'l-kitābi'l-mubīn (Yūsuf 12/1), tilka āyātu'l-kitābi'l-ḥakīm (Luqmān 31/2 — treated in Luqmān). Al-Shuʿarāʾ uses the same attribute as Yūsuf: al-mubīn.
The root has been analysed in many places across the series (al-Zukhruf 43/2, al-Dukhān 44/2, Yāsīn) and is not repeated. The description given there: at the core of the root lies separation, the opening of a gap between two things; bayn — the space between. A thing becomes visible when it separates out.
And mubīn is an active participle, that is, not "made clear" but "making clear". The distinction matters here: the Book is not merely intelligible, it is what makes things intelligible.
| Verse | Construction | What it qualifies |
|---|---|---|
| 2 | al-kitābi'l-mubīn | The Book |
| 32 | thuʿbānun mubīn | What the staff turned into |
| 97 | ḍalālin mubīn | Error |
| 115 | nadhīrun mubīn | Noah himself |
| 195 | lisānin ʿarabiyyin mubīn | The language |
The sūra thus opens with the word for clarity and, in verse 195, ties that same word to language. This link will be treated in the section on 192-199.
لَعَلَّكَ بَٰخِعٌ نَّفْسَكَ أَلَّا يَكُونُوا۟ مُؤْمِنِينَ
The concrete sense the lexicographers give for the root ب-خ-ع comes from the slaughter of animals: bakhaʿa'sh-shāta — in slaughtering a sheep, to carry the knife as far as the point at the very base of the neck vertebrae called the bukhʿ. The cut has been taken past what was necessary, carried to the very end of the limit.
| Derivative | Sense | Shared core |
|---|---|---|
| Bakhaʿa nafsahu | To drive oneself as though to destruction | To carry to the end |
| Bakhaʿa bi'l-ḥaqqi | To render what is due in full, without shortfall | To carry to the end |
At the centre of the root, then, lies not "excess" but "reaching the final point". Reaching the final point in slaughter wounds the animal beyond need; reaching the final point in rendering what is due gives it in full. The same motion produces two different results in two different contexts.
And the picture of the verse comes from this: the messenger is carrying his grief as far as his own life. The word does not say "to grieve greatly"; it says "to carry grief to the point where life ends".
That an active participle is used must also be recorded: bākhiʿun — "destroying". A noun, not a verb (tabkhaʿu). In Arabic the active participle can announce that the action is a settled state in the agent. What is described is therefore not a passing grief but a continuing condition.
لَعَلَّ — usually rendered "perhaps, it may be that". Here it announces no expectation; the lexicographers give this usage the sense of ishfāq (anxiety, warning against). The closest English renderings are "almost" and "you are on the point of".
Allā yakūnū — originally li-allā yakūnū, that is, a construction announcing cause: "because they will not believe".
There is a point of word order that must be recorded: the verse does not give as the cause of the grief the hostility, the injury or the mockery of those addressed. All of these occur elsewhere in the sūra (29, 116, 167, 186). The only cause given is that they do not believe.
This verse is one of the sharpest statements in the Qurʾān of the limit drawn for the messenger, and it has been treated six times across the series. In al-Qaṣaṣ 28/56 these verses were gathered into a table. Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/3 is the seventh row added to that table:
| Place | Expression | What it limits |
|---|---|---|
| Al-Aḥqāf 46/35 | Balāgh | The task — it is delivery |
| Al-Zumar 39/41 | Wa mā anta ʿalayhim bi-wakīl | Responsibility |
| Qāf 50/45 | Wa mā anta ʿalayhim bi-jabbār | The authority to compel |
| Fāṭir 35/8 | Fa-lā tadhhab nafsuka ʿalayhim ḥasarāt | Grief |
| Luqmān 31/23 | Fa-lā yaḥzunka kufruh | Grief |
| Al-Qaṣaṣ 28/56 | Lā tahdī man aḥbabta | Love — the closest bond |
| Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/3 | Laʿallaka bākhiʿun nafsaka | The body — life itself |
Seven verses, seven different words. And that of al-Shuʿarāʾ stands on the same line as that of Fāṭir, but one step beyond it:
| Fāṭir 35/8 | Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/3 | |
|---|---|---|
| Mood | Prohibition — fa-lā tadhhab ("let it not go") | Statement — laʿallaka bākhiʿun ("you are almost doing it") |
| Object | Nafsuka — your life | Nafsaka — your life |
| Verb | Tadhhab … ḥasarāt — to waste away in regret | Bakhaʿa — to cut to the very end |
| What it says | "Do not" | "You are doing it" |
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the difference of mood: in Fāṭir there is a prohibition, in al-Shuʿarāʾ an observation. Fāṭir holds the messenger back from a behaviour; al-Shuʿarāʾ shows him the condition he is already in. Since it is not known with certainty which of the two verses came down first, I set up no ordering.
The condition the verse describes is one that everyone who takes on a task recognises: bearing the weight of an outcome one cannot change. The verse does not blame this condition — the word bākhiʿun is not the name of a fault, and the rest of the sūra does not scold the messenger. The verse only shows the limit: the work done is delivery; what the one who receives it will do belongs to another domain.
إِن نَّشَأْ نُنَزِّلْ عَلَيْهِم مِّنَ ٱلسَّمَآءِ ءَايَةً فَظَلَّتْ أَعْنَٰقُهُمْ لَهَا خَٰضِعِينَ
"If We willed, We would send down upon them a sign from heaven, and their necks would stay bowed before it."
The verse is a conditional sentence, and it announces that the condition is not realised. What it says is this: compulsion is possible; but it is not being done.
And this is the answer to the grief in the third verse. The messenger grieves that those addressed do not believe. The verse says: making them believe is not a matter that stands at the limit of power. If it were willed, the necks would bow. It is not willed — and this is not a lack but a choice.
ظَلَّ — one of the sisters of kāna; its original sense is "to remain in a state through the day", and from there it widens to "to be continuously in that state". Fa-ẓallat is in the perfect.
A point of word order: the apodosis of a conditional (jawāb al-sharṭ) normally comes in the imperfect — fa-taẓallu would have been expected. That it comes in the perfect is the Arabic technique of recounting as already done what is certain to happen. Not "they would bow", then, but "they stayed bowed". The condition has not been realised; but the certainty of the apodosis is announced by the mood of the verb.
And the sense of the verb ẓalla itself is added here: the necks do not bow for a moment, they stay bowed. Continuance lies inside the verb.
Aʿnāq (necks) is a plural of what has no reason; by rule its predicate should have come as a feminine singular or a broken plural: khāḍiʿatan or khāḍiʿatun. But the word that comes is khāḍiʿīn — the sound masculine plural used for rational beings.
| Explanation | Ground | Its weak side |
|---|---|---|
| The neck has stood in place of its owner | In Arabic a part can represent the whole; for the neck to bow is already for the person to bow | It explains the result, not why the rule was broken |
| The predicate belongs not to the necks but to their owners (hum khāḍiʿīna) | A hidden subject is supplied in the sentence | It requires a supplied word |
| The necks have been treated as human | The Qurʾān can give the rational plural pattern to inanimate things (Yūsuf 12/4 — sājidīn for the stars) | The intra-Qurʾānic example is strong but limited |
| Aʿnāq means "a body, the leading men" | Some lexicographers transmit that the word ʿunuq means "the leading men of a people" | This sense is not widespread |
The example of Yūsuf 12/4 is worth recording: there, of eleven stars, it is said raʾaytuhum lī sājidīn — the pattern for rational beings. Where a thing performs the act of bowing or prostrating, then, the Qurʾān can use the language of rational beings for it. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
عُنُق — the neck. The neck is the place where submission and resistance appear at the same time. The head stands upright because the neck carries it; the one who submits bends his neck. This is why the word aʿnāq occurs in Arabic in contexts both of pride (shāmikhu'l-ʿunuq — his neck held high) and of bondage (fī aʿnāqihim aghlālan — Yā Sīn 36/8).
And there is a link within the sūra: in Yā Sīn 36/8 collars are put around the necks and the heads are forced upward; here the necks bow of themselves. In both verses the neck is brought into a position outside the will. I record this as an observation.
| Possibility | Act | |
|---|---|---|
| The verse's expression | In nashaʾ nunazzil | The condition is not realised |
| Its result | The necks bow | The necks do not bow |
| What it announces | Power is unlimited | A method has been chosen |
The Qurʾān sets up this distinction elsewhere too: wa law shāʾa rabbuka la-āmana man fi'l-arḍi kulluhum jamīʿā (Yūnus 10/99), wa law shiʾnā la-ātaynā kulla nafsin hudāhā (al-Sajda 32/13 — treated in al-Sajda). All three verses have the same structure: willing + compelling + not realised.
And the difference here is worth recording: in Yūnus and al-Sajda the instrument of the compulsion is not named; in al-Shuʿarāʾ it is: a sign coming down from heaven. The sūra thus says that the very thing those addressed are asking for (a miracle) would in fact be compulsion.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the description of the result: khāḍiʿīn — to bow. The verse recounts what would happen if a miracle came not as "they would believe" but as "their necks would bow". The difference between faith and bowing the neck stands in the verse's choice of word. This is an explanation, not a ruling.
There are two ways of getting a view accepted: making it irresistible and persuading. The first is quick, its result is certain, and what it produces is a bowed neck. The second is slow, its result is uncertain, and what it produces is conviction. The verse says that the first is possible and chooses the second — and it says this to a messenger who is grieving.
وَمَا يَأْتِيهِم مِّن ذِكْرٍ مِّنَ ٱلرَّحْمَٰنِ مُحْدَثٍ إِلَّا كَانُوا۟ عَنْهُ مُعْرِضِينَ · فَقَدْ كَذَّبُوا۟ فَسَيَأْتِيهِمْ أَنۢبَٰٓؤُا۟ مَا كَانُوا۟ بِهِۦ يَسْتَهْزِءُونَ
Wa mā yaʾtīhim min dhikrin mina'r-raḥmāni muḥdathin illā kānū ʿanhu muʿriḍīn · Fa-qad kadhdhabū fa-sa-yaʾtīhim anbāʾu mā kānū bihi yastahziʾūn
"No new reminder comes to them from the Merciful but that they turn away from it. · So they have denied; and the tidings of what they used to mock will come to them before long."
Root ح-د-ث: to come to be afterwards, to occur. Ḥadīth — what is new, an event, a saying. مُحْدَث — passive participle: brought into being afterwards, newly sent down.
The word is an attribute of dhikr and looks to the moment of revelation: each newly descending portion. The verse therefore recounts not a single event but a repeated reaction: each time a new one comes, the same thing happens.
It is known that this word has been drawn into the debate in the history of theology over whether the Qurʾān is "created". In this commentary I do not enter that debate; the context of the verse is the newness of the revelation, not a dispute about being. I record this as a limitation, not as a view.
The name was analysed in detail in al-Raḥmān and is not repeated.
What is to be added here is an observation about the structure: the name set opposite the act of turning away is not al-Qahhār or al-Jabbār but al-Raḥmān. What is turned away from is therefore presented not as a threat but as a mercy. The same technique was recorded at Yāsīn 36/11 and al-Zukhruf 43/36.
سَ (sīn) announces the near future in Arabic. For the distant future sawfa is used. Not "one day", then, but "before long".
أَنۢبَآء — the plural of nabaʾ; root ن-ب-أ: a great and weighty piece of news. The root was analysed in al-Nabaʾ. Ordinary news is called khabar; weighty news, nabaʾ.
And the point of word order is this: what is to come is not the punishment but the tidings. Anbāʾu mā kānū bihi yastahziʾūn — "the tidings of what they used to mock". When the thing mocked comes about, then, it no longer arrives as tidings but as event. This expression is repeated in the Qurʾān: wa ḥāqa bihim mā kānū bihi yastahziʾūn (al-Anʿām 6/10; Hūd 11/8).
أَوَلَمْ يَرَوْا۟ إِلَى ٱلْأَرْضِ كَمْ أَنۢبَتْنَا فِيهَا مِن كُلِّ زَوْجٍ كَرِيمٍ
In the fourth verse a sign that would come down from heaven was spoken of. The seventh verse points to the sign standing on the earth.
| 26/4 | 26/7 | |
|---|---|---|
| From where | Mina's-samāʾ — from heaven | Fi'l-arḍ — on the earth |
| Its state | It does not come down (the condition is not realised) | It is already there |
| Its effect | It makes the neck bow | It requires looking |
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the sequence of the two verses: the sign that is asked for does not come, because the sign that stands is not looked at. A-wa lam yaraw — "have they not looked?"
A point of word order: the verb is lam yaraw (they did not see), but it comes with the preposition ilā: yaraw ilā al-arḍ. In Arabic raʾā takes a direct object (raʾā'sh-shayʾa — he saw the thing); when it comes with ilā, the sense of looking, of directing the gaze, comes to the front.
The verse therefore says not "did they not see?" but "did they not look?" Seeing is a passive business; it happens while the eye is open. Looking is a directed business. The difference stands in the preposition.
The root was analysed at al-Nabaʾ 78/8 (wa khalaqnākum azwājā) and at al-Zukhruf 43/12 (khalaqa'l-azwāja kullahā).
The description given there: زَوْج is not "a pair" but "one member of a pair". Anything that has a mate is called zawj. The English "pair" names two things together; the Arabic zawj names the single thing that has a mate.
Its use for plants is worth recording: the verse names plants as zawj. The Qurʾān repeats this in several places (min kulli'th-thamarāti jaʿala fīhā zawjayni'thnayn — al-Raʿd 13/3; wa anbatnā fīhā min kulli zawjin bahīj — Qāf 50/7, treated in Qāf).
That plants mate (pollination, male and female organs) is a fact known today. No claim of a scientific miracle is set up in this commentary — the use of the word in Arabic already covers everything that has a mate, and in some plants such as the date palm the distinction of male and female was something the Arab farmer knew. What is to be recorded is this: the verse names the thing it asks to be looked at not as "variety" but as "mating". I leave this as an observation about the word.
Root ك-ر-م: generosity, worth, nobility. Used of a person the word means "worthy, noble"; used of soil, "fertile"; used of a plant, "useful, fine".
The lexicographers give the core of the word as "a thing's being the good of its own kind". What is karīm is what gives more than it had to give.
And the same word will occur once more later in the sūra: wa maqāmin karīm (58) — the "noble station" taken from the people of Pharaoh. The sūra thus gives the same attribute both to what the earth gives and to what man loses. This is a repetition that can be verified from the text.
إِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ لَءَايَةً ۖ وَمَا كَانَ أَكْثَرُهُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ · وَإِنَّ رَبَّكَ لَهُوَ ٱلْعَزِيزُ ٱلرَّحِيمُ
"In this there is surely a sign; but most of them were not believers. · And your Lord — He indeed — is the Mighty, the Merciful."
The seal that will occur eight times in the sūra occurs here for the first time — and here it does not yet close an account. What it closes is a proof: the plant of the seventh verse.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is position: in the sūra the seal comes first after a proof from nature; in the seven occurrences that follow it will come after a proof from history. The sūra thus applies the same judgement to two different kinds of proof: "in this there is a sign, most did not believe" — for the plant as well as for the seven peoples.
One — mā kāna is in the perfect. The imperfect (wa mā aktharuhum muʾminīn) could also have been said; and indeed the Qurʾān says it so elsewhere (Hūd 11/17 — fa-lā taku fī miryatin minh; Yūsuf 12/103 — wa mā aktharu'n-nāsi wa law ḥaraṣta bi-muʾminīn). Here the perfect has been chosen: "were not believers." This accords with the accounts to be recounted in the seven occurrences that follow — there it will really be the past that is spoken of.
Two — that akthar (most) is said is that kull (all) is not said. The seal is repeated eight times, and in all eight it says "most". That a minority believed in every account is thus hidden in the sentence itself. In the account of Noah this minority also appears in the text (wa man maʿiya mina'l-muʾminīn, 118); in the account of Lot, his household (170); in the account of Ṣāliḥ it does not appear.
I record this as an observation about the structure: the sentence does not announce despair. What it announces is a proportion.
Both names have been analysed across the series and are not repeated: for ʿazīz, Fāṭir and al-Ḥashr; for raḥīm, al-Raḥmān and al-Fātiḥa.
In summary: the core of the root ع-ز-ز is hardness, resistance to wear — arḍun ʿazāz, hard ground. The ʿazīz is the one who cannot be reached, cannot be overcome, cannot be broken. The core of the root ر-ح-م is the womb — the closeness that protects and raises.
What is to be added here is their coming together. This pair occurs in about thirteen places in the Qurʾān, and the eight occurrences in al-Shuʿarāʾ make up the greater part of that. The instances outside the sūra: Yā Sīn 36/5 (tanzīla'l-ʿazīzi'r-raḥīm), al-Rūm 30/5, al-Sajda 32/6, al-Dukhān 44/42.
| Name | What it looks toward | Its counterpart in the sūra |
|---|---|---|
| al-ʿAzīz | Irresistibility | The end of the seven peoples — those destroyed |
| al-Raḥīm | Protecting and watching over | The end of the seven prophets — those saved |
The second verse of the seal thus gives both faces at once of the judgement "most did not believe" in the first verse. And this explains why the sūra closes every account with two verses: one verse states the fact, the other the measure.
And the pronoun is worth recording: la-huwa. Wa inna rabbaka la-huwa al-ʿazīzu'r-raḥīm — there is a separating pronoun (ḍamīr al-faṣl) between them. In Arabic this pronoun announces restriction (ḥaṣr) and emphasis: "the truly Mighty and Merciful is He." The same construction does not occur at the beginning of the sūra, nor at its end — only in this seal, eight times.
The longest section of the sūra: fifty-nine verses. About one third of the total length of the seven accounts.
And the account does not fit the mould of the sūra: there is no kadhdhabat … al-mursalīn opening, no idh qāla lahum akhūhum, no innī lakum rasūlun amīn triad. There is only the closing seal (67-68).
In the Qurʾān the account of Moses is recounted in many sūras, and each sūra brings a different piece to the front. In this commentary the section al-Qaṣaṣ treated the part of the account running from the birth to Midian and the call in the valley; al-Nāziʿāt 79/15-26 treated the shortest telling (twelve verses). The part that falls to al-Shuʿarāʾ is what comes after the call: the presence of Pharaoh, the sorcerers, and the sea.
| Sūra | What it brings to the front | Where it was treated |
|---|---|---|
| Al-Qaṣaṣ 28 | The birth, the mother, Midian, the call | al-Qaṣaṣ |
| Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26 | The confrontation with Pharaoh, the sorcerers, the sea | here |
| Al-Nāziʿāt 79 | The shortest summary — idhhab ilā firʿawna innahu ṭaghā | al-Nāziʿāt |
| Al-Ṣāffāt 37 | Only the deliverance and the victory — four verses | al-Ṣāffāt |
| Al-Dukhān 44 | The abandoning of the people, the transfer of the inheritance | al-Dukhān |
وَإِذْ نَادَىٰ رَبُّكَ مُوسَىٰٓ أَنِ ٱئْتِ ٱلْقَوْمَ ٱلظَّٰلِمِينَ · قَوْمَ فِرْعَوْنَ ۚ أَلَا يَتَّقُونَ
"And when your Lord called Moses: 'Go to the wrongdoing people — the people of Pharaoh. Will they still not guard themselves?'"
The first thing to be recorded is an absence: al-Shuʿarāʾ does not recount here the valley, the fire, the tree, the staff or the hand. It begins straight away with the command: ani'ti'l-qawma'ẓ-ẓālimīn.
The same scene was recounted in detail at al-Qaṣaṣ 28/29-35 and was treated in al-Qaṣaṣ; in Ṭāhā 20/9-24 it occurs in its longest form. What al-Shuʿarāʾ leaves out is what the others recount.
I record this as an observation: the sūra does not recount the account from the beginning; it takes it up at the point where it enters the mould. And the mould of the sūra is this: the messenger speaks, the people answer. In the scene in the valley there is no people.
أَن here is explicative (tafsīriyya): it opens the content of the verb nādā (he called) that precedes it. It is like saying "he called thus:".
And the command is a single word: iʾti — go. Neither a consolation nor an equipment is set beside it. The equipment will not come until the fifteenth verse (fa'dhhabā bi-āyātinā). The order is therefore this: first the command, then the objection, then the support.
| Order | Expression | What it gives |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | al-qawma'ẓ-ẓālimīn | The attribute — what they do |
| 2 | qawma Firʿawn | The identity — who they are |
What they are is said first, then who they are. The attribute has been brought forward, the name comes after.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the order: the reason for the mission is not identity but deed. The same technique was recorded in al-Fajr too where the peoples are named — the Qurʾān targets a community not by its name but by its attribute. This is the textual ground of the principle recorded in Method: the judgement is built not on an ethnic or religious group but on the attribute.
The sentence alā tattaqūn, which will occur five times in the sūra, occurs here for the first time — and in this one place its person is different: alā yattaqūn.
| Account | Verse | Who says it | To whom | Person |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Moses | 11 | God | To Moses | yattaqūn — third person |
| Noah | 106 | Noah | To his people | tattaqūn — second person |
| Hūd | 124 | Hūd | To his people | tattaqūn |
| Ṣāliḥ | 142 | Ṣāliḥ | To his people | tattaqūn |
| Lot | 161 | Lot | To his people | tattaqūn |
| Shuʿayb | 177 | Shuʿayb | To his people | tattaqūn |
The sentence therefore occurs six times; in five it is the prophet's address to his people, in one it is God's word to the prophet. This is a difference that can be verified from the text.
I record an explanation as my own reading, and it is not binding: in the other five accounts the messenger is from within his own people — akhūhum, "their brother". Moses is not from within the people he is sent to; he goes to the people of Pharaoh from outside. That the sentence comes in the third person accords with that distance: the people are not yet close enough to be addressed as "you".
And there is a datum from the text that supports this explanation: the same people will say to Moses, in the eighteenth verse, "did we not raise you?" Moses grew up among that people but is not of them. The sūra preserves this doubleness.
أَلَا — hamza (interrogative) + lā (negation). In Arabic the pattern announces not a question but urging and reproach: "still not?"
قَالَ رَبِّ إِنِّىٓ أَخَافُ أَن يُكَذِّبُونِ · وَيَضِيقُ صَدْرِى وَلَا يَنطَلِقُ لِسَانِى فَأَرْسِلْ إِلَىٰ هَٰرُونَ · وَلَهُمْ عَلَىَّ ذَنۢبٌ فَأَخَافُ أَن يَقْتُلُونِ
Qāla rabbi innī akhāfu an yukadhdhibūn · Wa yaḍīqu ṣadrī wa lā yanṭaliqu lisānī fa-arsil ilā Hārūn · Wa lahum ʿalayya dhanbun fa-akhāfu an yaqtulūn
"He said: 'My Lord! I fear that they will deny me. · My breast grows tight and my tongue does not loosen; so send to Aaron (Hārūn) as well. · Moreover they hold an offence against me; I fear that they will kill me.'"
The command was a single sentence. The answer is three verses. And the order of the three objections is worth recording:
| Order | Objection | What it belongs to |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | An yukadhdhibūn — they will deny | The other side's reaction |
| 2 | Yaḍīqu ṣadrī · lā yanṭaliqu lisānī | His own condition |
| 3 | Lahum ʿalayya dhanbun · an yaqtulūn | His past and the danger to his life |
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the order: the lightest first, the heaviest last. The fear of death is named third — not first. The text therefore gives the messenger's foremost anxiety as the failure of the mission, not as his own life.
The root ض-ي-ق: narrowness. Ḍayq — to be narrow. Its opposites are saʿa (breadth) and sharḥ (to split open and widen).
| Person | Expression | Where | Direction |
|---|---|---|---|
| Moses | Wa yaḍīqu ṣadrī — my breast grows tight | Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/13 | Tightening — complaint |
| Moses | Rabbi'shraḥ lī ṣadrī — expand my breast | Ṭāhā 20/25 | Expansion — request |
| Muhammad | A-lam nashraḥ laka ṣadrak — did We not open your breast | Al-Inshirāḥ 94/1 | Expansion — already given |
| Muhammad | Wa laqad naʿlamu annaka yaḍīqu ṣadruka bimā yaqūlūn | Al-Ḥijr 15/97 | Tightening — known |
This word was analysed in al-Inshirāḥ, and the description recorded there holds here too. What is to be added here is an overlap: the Qurʾān records that the breast of both messengers grew tight; to one it says "We expanded it", the other asks "expand it".
And a link can be made with the third verse of the sūra. I record it as my own reading: at 26/3 it was said to the one addressed (Muhammad) "you are almost destroying yourself". In the thirteenth verse another messenger says "my breast grows tight". Twenty verses lie between the two, and both recount the burden the messenger carries. That this link is made is not stated in the text; the position offers an overlap.
The root ط-ل-ق: the untying of a bond, becoming free. Ṭalāq (the untying of the bond of marriage) is from the same root — it was treated in al-Ṭalāq. Inṭilāq (Form VII) — to come untied of itself, to be released.
The expression therefore does not say "I cannot speak". It says: my tongue does not loosen — it stays tied, it does not flow.
And the Qurʾān recounts the same condition in Ṭāhā with another word: wa'ḥlul ʿuqdatan min lisānī (20/27) — "untie a knot from my tongue". The two sūras use the same picture: bond and knot.
Reports are transmitted to the effect that this condition had a medical or physiological cause; the Qurʾān gives no cause. The only thing the text gives is the condition itself: the tongue does not flow. About the cause I say nothing.
And Moses' own words at al-Qaṣaṣ 28/34 confirm this: wa akhī Hārūnu huwa afṣaḥu minnī lisānā — "my brother Aaron is clearer than I in tongue". That passage was treated in al-Qaṣaṣ, and I rely on that treatment.
A point of word order worth recording. Moses does not say "send Aaron with me"; he says fa-arsil ilā Hārūn — "send to Aaron".
The object of the verb is not stated, only its direction is given. The transmitted explanations: (a) "send Gabriel to Aaron", that is, reveal to him too; (b) "give the messengership to Aaron as well". Both explanations come out at the same door: the request is not for an assistant but for a fellow messenger.
The request at al-Qaṣaṣ 28/34 is different: fa-arsilhu maʿiya ridʾan yuṣaddiqunī — "send him with me as a support, to confirm me". As was recorded in al-Qaṣaṣ, there the request is for confirmation. Two different faces of the same event are given in the two sūras: in al-Shuʿarāʾ messengership, in al-Qaṣaṣ support. I record this as an observation; it is not a contradiction but two different emphases.
This expression refers to a piece of the account that al-Shuʿarāʾ does not recount: Moses' killing of a man in Egypt with his fist.
The event was treated in detail at al-Qaṣaṣ 28/14-21, and I rely on that treatment. The notes there were, in summary, these: the act is not a deliberate killing (wakaza — to strike with the fist; fa-qaḍā ʿalayh — he finished him); Moses himself assesses the event (hādhā min ʿamali'sh-shayṭān, innī ẓalamtu nafsī); and the text does not cover it up.
| Element | What it announces |
|---|---|
| Lahum | In their favour — they are the creditor side |
| ʿAlayya | Against me — I am the debtor side |
| Dhanbun | Indefinite — an offence |
Moses therefore recounts the event not in the language of his own conscience but in the language of the other side's law: "they have a claim upon me". He does not say innī ẓalamtu nafsī (al-Qaṣaṣ 28/16); he says "in their eyes I am guilty".
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the two prepositions (li and ʿalā): the sentence is not a confession of sin but a statement of risk. The matter is not the weight of the offence but what the other side will do about it — and the next sentence says this plainly: fa-akhāfu an yaqtulūn.
And the word dhanb: the root ذ-ن-ب, whose concrete sense is tail (dhanab). The connection the lexicographers give: an offence is what a person drags behind him — it comes after him, it does not let go. From this picture the word widens to "a burden, an act whose consequence trails after it".
And this picture agrees with the word order of the verse: Moses left Egypt years before; the offence has come after him.
All three are real, and not one of them is denied. The answer in the fifteenth verse does not say that the objections are wrong; it announces the outcome. This will be treated in the next section.
قَالَ كَلَّا ۖ فَٱذْهَبَا بِـَٔايَٰتِنَآ ۖ إِنَّا مَعَكُم مُّسْتَمِعُونَ · فَأْتِيَا فِرْعَوْنَ فَقُولَآ إِنَّا رَسُولُ رَبِّ ٱلْعَٰلَمِينَ · أَنْ أَرْسِلْ مَعَنَا بَنِىٓ إِسْرَٰٓءِيلَ
Qāla kallā; fa'dhhabā bi-āyātinā; innā maʿakum mustamiʿūn · Fa'tiyā Firʿawna fa-qūlā innā rasūlu rabbi'l-ʿālamīn · An arsil maʿanā banī Isrāʾīl
"He said: 'No! Go, both of you, with Our signs; We are with you, listening. · Come to Pharaoh and say: We are the messenger of the Lord of all the worlds. · Send the Children of Israel with us.'"
كَلَّا in Arabic announces firm refusal and deterrence. In the Qurʾān it generally comes to reject a claim (it was treated in al-Qiyāma, ʿAbasa, al-Takāthur).
What it rejects here has been disputed. There are two readings, and both can be supported from the text:
| Reading | What it rejects | Its ground |
|---|---|---|
| It rejects the fear | "They will not kill you" | The guarantee comes immediately after: innā maʿakum |
| It rejects the objection | "These excuses do not lift the mission" | The command is repeated after it: fa'dhhabā |
The two readings do not exclude one another. What is to be recorded is this: the first word after kallā is a command, not a consolation. The consolation is placed behind the command.
The verb is dual: idhhabā — "go, the two of you". But Aaron's being commissioned had not been stated in a verse; Moses had asked for it (13). The answer therefore does not announce in a separate sentence that the request is granted — it announces it directly through the form of the verb.
This is a point of word order and is worth recording: it is not said "I have sent Aaron too"; the verb shifts to the dual. The granting is inside the grammar.
| Explanation | Ground |
|---|---|
| Pharaoh is included | The exchange is to be mutual; the party listened to numbers three |
| Two persons have been counted as a plural | Using the plural in place of the dual is ordinary in Arabic |
| Moses, Aaron and the Children of Israel are meant | The Children of Israel are named in the seventeenth verse |
I do not impose a preference. But I record an observation: the same verse holds both the dual (idhhabā) and the plural (maʿakum); the change is therefore a deliberate shift, not a casualness.
مُّسْتَمِعُون — root س-م-ع, active participle of Form X. Samiʿa is to hear, istamaʿa is to lend an ear, to listen. The difference matters: hearing is passive, listening is a directed business.
The guarantee is therefore not "we hear you" but "we are listening to you". And this will meet, later in the sūra, the sentence that comes out of Pharaoh's mouth: alā tastamiʿūn (25) — "are you not listening?" The same verb, in two different mouths.
This construction is one of the notable places in Arabic grammar: the subject is plural (innā — we), the predicate singular (rasūlu — messenger). It is not "we are messengers" (rusulu) but "we are the messenger".
| Explanation | Ground |
|---|---|
| Rasūl is in the sense of a verbal noun | In Arabic rasūl is also used in the sense of "message, what is sent"; a verbal noun makes no singular-plural distinction |
| The message of the two is one | Two messengers carry a single messengership |
| In Arabic rasūl can be both singular and plural | The lexicographers record this property of the faʿūl pattern (like ʿaduww) |
The Qurʾān's own usage supports the first explanation: not fa-inna ʿalayka laʿnatī, but at Ṭāhā 20/47, for the same event, it says innā rasūlā rabbik (dual). The same scene is thus given in two sūras in two different moulds: singular in al-Shuʿarāʾ, dual in Ṭāhā. This is a difference that can be verified from the text and requires an explanation; I have given the transmitted explanations above, and I do not impose a preference.
And the content of the request is worth recording: faith is not asked for, the abandoning of the throne is not asked for. The only thing asked for is the release of a community.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the bareness of the sentence: the messengership first demands the lifting of a concrete wrong. The call to God's oneness will come later (23-28), because Pharaoh asks. The order is therefore this: first the demand of a right, then — upon the questioner's own question — the description of God.
قَالَ أَلَمْ نُرَبِّكَ فِينَا وَلِيدًا وَلَبِثْتَ فِينَا مِنْ عُمُرِكَ سِنِينَ · وَفَعَلْتَ فَعْلَتَكَ ٱلَّتِى فَعَلْتَ وَأَنتَ مِنَ ٱلْكَٰفِرِينَ
Qāla a-lam nurabbika fīnā walīdan wa labithta fīnā min ʿumurika sinīn · Wa faʿalta faʿlataka'llatī faʿalta wa anta mina'l-kāfirīn
"He said: 'Did we not raise you among us as a child? Did you not stay among us many years of your life? · And then you did that deed of yours which you did; you are one of the ungrateful.'"
Pharaoh does not discuss the request. He does not say a word about whether the Children of Israel will be released, about whether the messengership is true, about who God is. He turns the subject to the person.
| Move | Expression | What it does |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | A-lam nurabbika fīnā walīdā | Obligation — "we looked after you" |
| 2 | Wa faʿalta faʿlataka'llatī faʿalta | A past offence — "you are a killer" |
I record this as an observation: neither is an argument; both are a positioning directed at the person. They carry the conversation from a dispute about a right to an accounting of debt and crime.
The verb is rabbā (Form II): to raise, to bring up. And the lexicographers record that this verb comes from the same semantic field as the word رَبّ (Lord): the core of the root ر-ب-ب is to bring a thing up to its completion, to own it and watch over it. The root was analysed in al-Fātiḥa.
And the point of word order stands here: Moses had said he was the messenger of rabbu'l-ʿālamīn (16). Pharaoh reminds him of his own nurture. The two words are from the same root.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the sequence of the two verses: against the claim of "the Lord of all the worlds", Pharaoh puts forward his own lordship — not openly, but through a verb: "I raised you". Later in the sūra he will say it openly as well (29 — la-ini'ttakhadhta ilāhan ghayrī).
The root و-ل-د: to give birth. Walīd — newly born, a small child. The word increases the weight of the obligation: the one looked after was in no condition to defend himself.
And this refers to the scene at al-Qaṣaṣ 28/8-9: the child had reached Pharaoh's palace by water, and his wife had taken him in. That event was treated in al-Qaṣaṣ. Pharaoh names the result of the event and does not name its cause: he does not say why the child was put into the water.
A point of word order worth recording. Pharaoh does not name the event: he does not say "you killed a man". He repeats the word with a verbal noun from its own root: faʿalta faʿlata-ka'llatī faʿalta — "you did that deed of yours which you did".
| Element | Word | Its work |
|---|---|---|
| Verb | faʿalta | You did |
| Cognate accusative | faʿlata-ka | That deed of yours |
| Relative clause | allatī faʿalta | Which you did |
The same root three times. In Arabic this construction announces that the act is something known and needing no naming. The closest English rendering: "you did that deed of yours."
فَعْلَة — the faʿla pattern announces a single occurrence (in Arabic, maṣdar al-marra). That is: "that one act of yours". The same pattern was also recorded in this commentary at al-Qamar 54/36 for baṭsha (baṭshatanā — "our one seizing").
And one further observation: the vagueness of the expression increases the force of the accusation. An unnamed offence stands heavier than a named one — because, not being described, it cannot be answered.
The word means both "ungrateful" and "denier"; the core of the root ك-ف-ر is covering over, and it has been analysed across the series (al-Kāfirūn, al-Muddaththir).
The context here brings the ingratitude side forward: the sentence is the continuation of the sentence "we looked after you". What is being said is "you covered over the kindness".
But the second sense is also possible, and it is transmitted: having left the religion of Pharaoh. Both senses can be supported from the text; I do not impose a preference. What is to be recorded is this: the word comes out of the mouth of the accuser — and the sūra nowhere uses this word of Moses.
قَالَ فَعَلْتُهَآ إِذًا وَأَنَا۠ مِنَ ٱلضَّآلِّينَ · فَفَرَرْتُ مِنكُمْ لَمَّا خِفْتُكُمْ فَوَهَبَ لِى رَبِّى حُكْمًا وَجَعَلَنِى مِنَ ٱلْمُرْسَلِينَ · وَتِلْكَ نِعْمَةٌ تَمُنُّهَا عَلَىَّ أَنْ عَبَّدتَّ بَنِىٓ إِسْرَٰٓءِيلَ
Qāla faʿaltuhā idhan wa anā mina'ḍ-ḍāllīn · Fa-farartu minkum lammā khiftukum fa-wahaba lī rabbī ḥukman wa jaʿalanī mina'l-mursalīn · Wa tilka niʿmatun tamunnuhā ʿalayya an ʿabbadta banī Isrāʾīl
"He said: 'I did it then, and I was one of those who had strayed. · So I fled from you when I feared you. Then my Lord bestowed judgement upon me and made me one of the messengers. · And that favour you hold over me is that you have enslaved the Children of Israel!'"
| Verse | Work | Kind |
|---|---|---|
| 20 | Faʿaltuhā idhan | Admission — he does not deny the act |
| 21 | Fa-farartu … fa-wahaba lī rabbī | Narrative — what happened in between |
| 22 | Wa tilka niʿmatun tamunnuhā | Counter-move — the obligation refuted |
Moses therefore takes up the two accusations in reverse order: Pharaoh had named the obligation first, then the offence; Moses first admits the offence, then refutes the obligation. The heavier is taken up first.
إِذًا — "then, at that time". An adverb of time. The work of the word is to place the act in a period: in the state I was in then.
The root ض-ل-ل: to lose the way, to fail to find the right direction. The root was analysed in al-Fātiḥa and in al-Najm. In this context the word means not "denier" but "one who does not fully know what he is doing, one who has missed the mark" — indeed at al-Ḍuḥā 93/7 the same root is used of a messenger (wa wajadaka ḍāllan fa-hadā), and that distinction was treated in al-Ḍuḥā.
| Explanation | Ground |
|---|---|
| "At that moment I was in a state of not knowing what to do" | The sense of ḍalāl as "to be at a loss, to miss the mark" |
| "Messengership had not yet been given, the knowledge was not complete" | The continuation of the verse: fa-wahaba lī rabbī ḥukman |
| "I acted without knowing the ruling" | It accords with his own assessment at al-Qaṣaṣ 28/15-16 |
All three point in the same direction: that the act is not owned as a deliberate murder, but is not covered over either. As was recorded in al-Qaṣaṣ, the text does not conceal a grave event in the life of a prophet.
A point of word order: Moses conceals neither his flight nor his fear. And the order is worth recording: farartu (I fled) comes first, khiftukum (I feared you) after — the cause is placed behind the result. In Arabic lammā makes this link: "I fled because I feared".
And this ties back to the objection in the fourteenth verse: Moses had said to God "I fear that they will kill me". Now he says the same fear to the face of the one he feared. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
Three verbs, three stages: farartu (I fled) → wahaba lī (He bestowed on me) → jaʿalanī (He made me).
حُكْم — root ح-ك-م: to make a thing firm, to prevent its going wrong. The concrete use of the root comes from the keeping of animals: ḥakama — to put the bit into a horse's mouth; ḥakama is also the name of the bit itself. Judgement, then, is what holds in check. The root was analysed at Luqmān 31/12 (ḥikma).
What is transmitted about the sense of the word here: knowledge, prophethood, the capacity to decide rightly. I adopt no firm preference; the core of the root (to make firm) fits all three.
And the same word will occur once more in the account of Abraham: rabbi hab lī ḥukman (83). Two prophets in the sūra thus use the same word — one says "it was given", the other asks "give". This is a repetition that can be verified from the text.
تَمُنُّهَا — root م-ن-ن: to cut, to sever (the concrete sense); from there to bestow a gift and to hold a gift over someone's head. The root was treated in Muḥammad and at al-Ḥujurāt 49/17 (yamunnūna ʿalayka an aslamū).
| Face | Sense | Example in the Qurʾān |
|---|---|---|
| As a verb (of God) | To grant a favour | Wa nurīdu an namunna — al-Qaṣaṣ 28/5 |
| As a verb (of a human) | To throw what one gave in another's face | Lā tubṭilū ṣadaqātikum bi'l-mann — al-Baqara 2/264 |
And the point of word order stands exactly here: in saying "we raised you" Pharaoh is claiming a favour. In his answer Moses accepts the word (niʿmatun) but changes the verb: tamunnuhā — "which you hold over me". That it was a favour is not denied; what is said is what it is that stops a favour from being a favour.
عَبَّدْتَّ — root ع-ب-د, Form II (faʿʿala): to enslave, to reduce to bondage. The core of the root is submission, obedience; ʿabd — a slave, a servant. Form II adds transitivity and compulsion: "you made them slaves".
In this pattern the word occurs only here in the Qurʾān. This is a datum that can be verified from the text.
How the verse is constructed has been disputed, and the dispute changes the meaning. I give the transmitted readings in a table; I do not impose a preference.
| Reading | The construction of the sentence | Its meaning |
|---|---|---|
| Interrogative of denial (an implied question) | "Is this the favour you hold over me — that you enslaved the Children of Israel?" | Mockery and rejection |
| Statement of cause | "That favour exists only because you enslaved the Children of Israel" | The source of the favour is wrongdoing |
| Full acceptance, in the reverse direction | "Yes, this is a favour: you raised me — because you were killing all the children" | Mockery (istihzāʾ) |
What the three readings have in common is this, and it can be read from the text with certainty: niʿma and ʿabbadta stand in the same sentence, the one as the explanation of the other. Moses ties the kindness done to him to the order out of which that kindness came.
The background needed to understand this sentence was treated at al-Qaṣaṣ 28/1-6, and I rely on that treatment. The notes there were, in summary, these:
- يَسْتَضْعِف — root ض-ع-ف, Form X: to count someone weak and to make him weak. The pattern matters: weakness is not something that happens of itself but something that is done.
- Pharaoh's work is recounted with three verbs, and the first is dividing (wa jaʿala ahlahā shiyaʿā); wrongdoing first breaks a society into pieces.
- Two verbs are set side by side: yudhabbiḥu abnāʾahum wa yastaḥyī nisāʾahum — to slaughter the sons, to keep the women alive.
| Al-Qaṣaṣ 28/4 | Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/22 | |
|---|---|---|
| Word | Yastaḍʿifu — Form X | ʿAbbadta — Form II |
| Core of the root | Ḍaʿf — weakness | ʿAbd — servitude |
| What the pattern adds | Counting weak and making weak | Making a slave by force |
| Who says it | The narrator — the Qurʾān, from outside | Moses — face to face |
| Tense | Imperfect — it is going on | Perfect — done, completed |
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the two patterns: in al-Qaṣaṣ the fact is recounted, in al-Shuʿarāʾ the fact is said to the face. And the word used in al-Shuʿarāʾ is the heavier: istiḍʿāf is to render powerless; taʿbīd is to reduce to bondage. The second is the outcome the first has reached.
And when the two sūras are read together the whole sentence emerges: the reason Moses grew up in the palace is that the sons of the Children of Israel were being killed. What Pharaoh calls a "favour" is thus a by-product of his own wrongdoing — the child was put into the water because of that very order. Al-Shuʿarāʾ does not state this chain openly; it becomes visible when read together with al-Qaṣaṣ. I record this link as a reading of the Qurʾān by the Qurʾān.
The measure the verse sets up is a concrete measure for relations of obligation: the worth of a kindness is measured not on its own but together with the order out of which it came. When an order first leaves a community powerless and then does a kindness to one of that community, what emerges is not a kindness but another face of the same order.
And the verse is striking in that the one who says this is not a bystanding victim but someone who actually received that kindness. Moses does not refuse the kindness — he carries the reckoning back to the order the giver built with his own hand.
قَالَ فِرْعَوْنُ وَمَا رَبُّ ٱلْعَٰلَمِينَ · قَالَ رَبُّ ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَٱلْأَرْضِ وَمَا بَيْنَهُمَآ ۖ إِن كُنتُم مُّوقِنِينَ · قَالَ لِمَنْ حَوْلَهُۥٓ أَلَا تَسْتَمِعُونَ · قَالَ رَبُّكُمْ وَرَبُّ ءَابَآئِكُمُ ٱلْأَوَّلِينَ · قَالَ إِنَّ رَسُولَكُمُ ٱلَّذِىٓ أُرْسِلَ إِلَيْكُمْ لَمَجْنُونٌ · قَالَ رَبُّ ٱلْمَشْرِقِ وَٱلْمَغْرِبِ وَمَا بَيْنَهُمَآ ۖ إِن كُنتُمْ تَعْقِلُونَ
Qāla Firʿawnu wa mā rabbu'l-ʿālamīn · Qāla rabbu's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍi wa mā baynahumā in kuntum mūqinīn · Qāla li-man ḥawlahu alā tastamiʿūn · Qāla rabbukum wa rabbu ābāʾikumu'l-awwalīn · Qāla inna rasūlakumu'lladhī ursila ilaykum la-majnūn · Qāla rabbu'l-mashriqi wa'l-maghribi wa mā baynahumā in kuntum taʿqilūn
"Pharaoh said: 'And what is the Lord of all the worlds?' · [Moses] said: 'The Lord of the heavens and the earth and what is between them — if you would know for certain.' · [Pharaoh] said to those around him: 'Are you not listening?' · [Moses] said: 'Your Lord and the Lord of your forefathers.' · [Pharaoh] said: 'This messenger of yours who has been sent to you is certainly possessed.' · [Moses] said: 'The Lord of the east and the west and what is between them — if you would use reason.'"
This is one of the most tightly built dialogue scenes in the Qurʾān. Six verses, six qāla, no explanation of any kind. The narrator does not step in: who felt what, who thought what, is not said. There are only the words.
| Verse | Who | What he does |
|---|---|---|
| 23 | Pharaoh | Question — wa mā rabbu'l-ʿālamīn |
| 24 | Moses | Answer 1 — place: the heavens, the earth, what is between |
| 25 | Pharaoh | Escape from the answer — he turns to the listeners |
| 26 | Moses | Answer 2 — time: you and your forefathers |
| 27 | Pharaoh | Accusation — la-majnūn |
| 28 | Moses | Answer 3 — direction: east, west, what is between |
The pattern is exact: Pharaoh speaks three times and all three times drops the question; Moses answers three times and all three times answers the same question.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the arrangement of the six verses: the scene shows not a debate but how a debate is broken off. Pharaoh does not refute the answer — he reacts to it.
A point of word order worth recording, and one that has been disputed: the question is asked with مَا ("what"), not with مَنْ ("who").
In Arabic mā asks after quiddity (what a thing is, its kind), man after identity. Rational beings are asked after with man.
| Explanation | Ground | Its weak side |
|---|---|---|
| Belittling and mockery | Mā is used for the non-rational; the question asks after a thing | In Arabic mā is also used to ask after an attribute |
| He is really asking after quiddity | Pharaoh may have met a concept he did not know | Pharaoh's own claim to divinity does not fit with such innocence |
| He wants to show that it cannot be defined | When the kind of a thing is asked for, what has no kind cannot be defined | Interpretation |
And Moses' answer seems to settle this dispute. I record it as my own reading: Moses gives no quiddity. He gives an act. He does not say "it is of such a kind"; he says "He is the Lord of such and such". The question looks for a kind; the answer shows a work.
Moses answers three times, and all three are in the same mould: rabbu … wa … wa mā baynahumā. But the field they cover changes:
| Answer | Verse | Extent | What kind of proof | Conditional clause |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 24 | Heavens, earth, what is between | Place — all of existence | In kuntum mūqinīn |
| 2 | 26 | You and your forefathers | Time — all of history | (no condition) |
| 3 | 28 | East, west, what is between | Direction — the whole horizon | In kuntum taʿqilūn |
The shared structure of the three answers and their differences can be verified from the text. I enter three notes:
One — in the second answer there is no conditional clause. The first and the third carry a qualification ending in in kuntum…; the second does not. And the second answer is the only one that takes those addressed themselves as its subject: rabbukum wa rabbu ābāʾikumu'l-awwalīn. I record it as my own reading: a person's own existence and the existence of his forefathers are not something he needs to be persuaded of — it is already in front of him.
Two — the contents of the conditions differ: īqān (certain knowledge) and ʿaql (the use of reason). The first answer looks to the whole of the universe and sets certain knowledge as its condition; the third answer looks to east and west, that is, to an order seen by the eye every day, and sets the use of reason as its condition. The larger claim is thus tied to the heavier condition, the more visible proof to the lighter one. I record this as an observation about the structure.
Three — the answers do not narrow backwards; they descend toward the horizon. While the heavens and the earth are abstract, east and west are two points seen every morning. The higher Moses raises the argument, the more concrete he makes the proof.
And the relatives of the east-west formula in the Qurʾān must be recorded: rabbu'l-mashāriq (al-Ṣāffāt 37/5 — plural, "the easts"), rabbu'l-mashriqayni wa rabbu'l-maghribayn (al-Raḥmān 55/17 — dual). Three verses, three different numbers: singular, dual, plural. This difference was treated in this commentary in al-Ṣāffāt and al-Raḥmān, and the explanation recorded there was this: the point at which the sun rises changes every day; the singular announces "direction", the dual "the two extremes", the plural "the point of each day". I do not repeat it here.
A point of word order: the sentence stands as a question but asks for no information. He does not suppose that they failed to hear what was said; he knows they heard it. The work of the sentence is to make the listener a witness: "look at what this man is saying".
And the verb is worth recording: tastamiʿūn — to listen. In the fifteenth verse the guarantee God gave Moses was from the same root and in the same pattern: innā maʿakum mustamiʿūn. The sūra thus uses the same verb in two different mouths:
| Verse | Who | Expression | What it means |
|---|---|---|---|
| 15 | God | Innā maʿakum mustamiʿūn | "We are listening" — a guarantee |
| 25 | Pharaoh | Alā tastamiʿūn | "Listen to this" — mockery |
This is an overlap that can be verified from the text. And as my own reading I record this: the guarantee given at the start of the scene comes from the same root as the verb that becomes an object of mockery in the middle of the scene. The messenger is not alone — and the sentence that tells him so uses the same word as the sentence that mocks him. That this link is intended is not stated in the text.
The root ج-ن-ن: to cover, to hide. Janna'l-layl — the night covered over. From the same root: jinn (the unseen), janna (the garden covered by trees), janīn (the covered one in the womb), junna (a shield), majnūn (one whose reason is covered over).
One — the position of the accusation. The accusation comes after Moses' most reasonable answer. What he said in the twenty-sixth verse was this: "your Lord and the Lord of your forefathers". There is nothing unintelligible in it. The accusation is given not to unintelligibility but to unacceptability.
Two — the word order of the accusation. Pharaoh does not say "you are possessed". He turns to the listeners and speaks in the third person: inna rasūlakumu'lladhī ursila ilaykum — "your messenger who was sent to you".
| Word | Whose the pronoun is | Its work |
|---|---|---|
| Rasūla-kum | Yours | Without denying the messengership, by saying "yours" he separates it from himself |
| Ursila ilaykum | To you | He does not count himself as the one addressed |
Pharaoh thus does two things at once: he removes Moses from being the one who addresses, and he removes himself from being the one addressed. He says "he was sent not to me but to you".
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the two pronouns. And the accusation la-majnūn at the start of the sūra is the brother of the accusation of poetry at the end of the sūra: both classify the speaker instead of discussing what is said. This link will be treated in the section on 224-226.
قَالَ لَئِنِ ٱتَّخَذْتَ إِلَٰهًا غَيْرِى لَأَجْعَلَنَّكَ مِنَ ٱلْمَسْجُونِينَ · قَالَ أَوَلَوْ جِئْتُكَ بِشَىْءٍ مُّبِينٍ · قَالَ فَأْتِ بِهِۦٓ إِن كُنتَ مِنَ ٱلصَّٰدِقِينَ
Qāla la-ini'ttakhadhta ilāhan ghayrī la-ajʿalannaka mina'l-masjūnīn · Qāla a-wa law jiʾtuka bi-shayʾin mubīn · Qāla fa'ti bihi in kunta mina'ṣ-ṣādiqīn
"[Pharaoh] said: 'If you take a god other than me, I will surely make you one of the imprisoned.' · [Moses] said: 'Even if I bring you something clear?' · [Pharaoh] said: 'Bring it, then, if you are one of the truthful!'"
Pharaoh's fourth utterance ends the debate. What ran from the twenty-third verse to the twenty-eighth was a question and answer; in the twenty-ninth verse the response is given not to the answer but to the speaker.
| Stage | Verses | Pharaoh's move |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | 23 | Question |
| 2 | 25 | Turning to the listener |
| 3 | 27 | Classification — "he is possessed" |
| 4 | 29 | Threat — "prison" |
I record this as an observation: four stages advancing along a line that moves away from argument. And at the last stage Pharaoh states his own claim openly for the first time: ilāhan ghayrī — "a god other than me". In the eighteenth verse he had implied it with a verb (a-lam nurabbika); now he says it with a word.
Pharaoh does not say "I will imprison you" (la-asjunannaka). He says "I will make you one of the imprisoned": la-ajʿalannaka mina'l-masjūnīn.
In Arabic this construction (verb + min + definite plural) means adding a person to a group, and the lexicographers record that it makes the threat heavier: the person does not become a prisoner on his own; he is put inside a known class.
| Verse | Expression | Who says it |
|---|---|---|
| 20 | Wa anā mina'ḍ-ḍāllīn | Moses |
| 21 | Wa jaʿalanī mina'l-mursalīn | Moses |
| 29 | La-ajʿalannaka mina'l-masjūnīn | Pharaoh |
| 31 | In kunta mina'ṣ-ṣādiqīn | Pharaoh |
| 42 | Wa innakum idhan la-mina'l-muqarrabīn | Pharaoh |
| 51 | An kunnā awwala'l-muʾminīn | The sorcerers |
| 116 | La-takūnanna mina'l-marjūmīn | The people of Noah |
| 167 | La-takūnanna mina'l-mukhrajīn | The people of Lot |
| 168 | Innī li-ʿamalikum mina'l-qālīn | Lot |
| 186 | Wa in naẓunnuka la-mina'l-kādhibīn | The people of al-Ayka |
| 213 | Fa-takūna mina'l-muʿadhdhabīn | (God, to the messenger) |
The sūra thus recounts people not one by one but by membership of a group. Everyone is placed inside a plural: among the messengers, among the sorcerers, among the liars, among the expelled, among those punished.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the count above: the closing of the sūra uses the same technique — wa'sh-shuʿarāʾu yattabiʿuhumu'l-ghāwūn (224) and illā 'lladhīna āmanū (227). At its end too the sūra makes a distinction of groups.
A point of word order: leaving the noun indefinite allows the claim to be set up against the threat. Moses is not bargaining, he promises no miracle — he asks for the ground of the threat: "even if I bring a proof?"
And the a-wa law pattern must be recorded: hamza (interrogative) + wāw + law (conditional). In English: "even if…?" This pattern does the same work in another place in the Qurʾān: a-wa law jiʾtukum bi-ahdā mimmā wajadtum ʿalayhi ābāʾakum (al-Zukhruf 43/24 — treated in al-Zukhruf). In both verses the pattern is set against a closed attitude.
I record this as an observation: the scene continues with permission given for the proof to be shown. And after the proof is shown (32-33), Pharaoh's reaction will be not to reject the proof but to name it: inna hādhā la-sāḥirun ʿalīm (34).
إِن كُنتَ مِنَ ٱلصَّٰدِقِين — the same mould again: the person is assigned to a group. And the conditional particle is in, not idhā — in Arabic in is used for the doubtful, idhā for the certain.
فَأَلْقَىٰ عَصَاهُ فَإِذَا هِىَ ثُعْبَانٌ مُّبِينٌ · وَنَزَعَ يَدَهُۥ فَإِذَا هِىَ بَيْضَآءُ لِلنَّٰظِرِينَ · قَالَ لِلْمَلَإِ حَوْلَهُۥٓ إِنَّ هَٰذَا لَسَٰحِرٌ عَلِيمٌ · يُرِيدُ أَن يُخْرِجَكُم مِّنْ أَرْضِكُم بِسِحْرِهِۦ فَمَاذَا تَأْمُرُونَ · قَالُوٓا۟ أَرْجِهْ وَأَخَاهُ وَٱبْعَثْ فِى ٱلْمَدَآئِنِ حَٰشِرِينَ · يَأْتُوكَ بِكُلِّ سَحَّارٍ عَلِيمٍ
Fa-alqā ʿaṣāhu fa-idhā hiya thuʿbānun mubīn · Wa nazaʿa yadahu fa-idhā hiya bayḍāʾu li'n-nāẓirīn · Qāla li'l-malaʾi ḥawlahu inna hādhā la-sāḥirun ʿalīm · Yurīdu an yukhrijakum min arḍikum bi-siḥrih; fa-mādhā taʾmurūn · Qālū arjih wa akhāhu wa'bʿath fi'l-madāʾini ḥāshirīn · Yaʾtūka bi-kulli saḥḥārin ʿalīm
"Thereupon he cast his staff; and there it was, a clear serpent! · And he drew out his hand; and there it was, white to the beholders! · [Pharaoh] said to the chiefs around him: 'This man is certainly a knowing sorcerer. · He wants to drive you out of your land with his sorcery. What do you command?' · They said: 'Hold him and his brother back, and send gatherers into the cities · to bring you every knowing sorcerer.'"
إِذَا here is not the conditional particle but what the lexicographers call idhā fujāʾiyya (the idhā of suddenness). Its work is to announce unexpectedness. In English it is rendered by "and there it was".
And the particle is repeated in both verses: fa-idhā hiya thuʿbān, fa-idhā hiya bayḍāʾ. Both miracles are thus given with the same suddenness.
A point of word order: the verse does not recount a transformation. It does not say "the staff turned into a snake"; it says "he cast it — and there it was, a serpent". The process in between is not in the text. This is so in the other places where the Qurʾān recounts this scene as well (al-Aʿrāf 7/107, Ṭāhā 20/20).
In this scene the Qurʾān uses three different words for what the staff turned into, and all three are for the same event. This is a datum that can be verified from the text:
| Word | Where | What it announces |
|---|---|---|
| ثُعْبَان (thuʿbān) | Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/32; al-Aʿrāf 7/107 | A great snake |
| حَيَّة (ḥayya) | Ṭāhā 20/20 | A snake (the general name) |
| جَآنّ (jānn) | Al-Naml 27/10; al-Qaṣaṣ 28/31 | A small, swift snake |
The apparent tension is this: the same thing is likened both to a large and to a small snake. The transmitted explanations: (a) the jānn comparison describes the movement (the swift coiling), the thuʿbān the body; (b) they are descriptions belonging to two different moments. I do not impose a preference; the first explanation accords with the dictionary sense of the words, because the distinguishing feature the lexicographers give for jānn is speed, not size.
And this scene was treated at al-Qaṣaṣ 28/29-35; what was recorded there was Moses' reaction: wallā mudbiran wa lam yuʿaqqib — he fled without looking back. Al-Shuʿarāʾ does not recount that reaction. Because the sūra sets the scene in Pharaoh's presence, it gives no place to Moses' fear at his first encounter.
The root ن-ز-ع: to pull out, to tear away. The root was analysed at al-Nāziʿāt 79/1 and is not repeated.
بَيْضَآءُ لِلنَّٰظِرِين — "white to the beholders". A note: the whiteness is described in the eyes of those who look. The miracle therefore stands not as a subjective experience but before witnesses.
Elsewhere the Qurʾān adds a qualification to this whiteness: min ghayri sūʾ — "with no disease in it" (al-Qaṣaṣ 28/32; Ṭāhā 20/22). Al-Shuʿarāʾ does not enter this qualification. This is a difference that can be verified from the text, and it may be explained thus: in al-Qaṣaṣ the address is to Moses (he is looking at his own hand), in al-Shuʿarāʾ the scene is in Pharaoh's presence. I record this as my own reading.
And the name he chooses is worth recording: sāḥirun ʿalīm — "a knowing sorcerer". Not a belittlement; a concession of expertise.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the attribute itself: it was not possible to deny the event, because everyone saw it. The way to neutralise an event that cannot be denied is to place it in a known category. Sorcery was a field known in that society and having its experts. Pharaoh therefore meets the event not with "it did not happen" but with "we know what kind of thing this is".
The same technique is repeated in the Qurʾān: hādhā siḥrun mubīn (al-Aḥqāf 46/7 — treated in al-Aḥqāf), hādhā siḥrun wa innā bihi kāfirūn (al-Zukhruf 43/30). And at the end of the sūra the same technique will be applied to Muhammad: "a poet", "possessed".
| Verse | Accusation | To whom addressed |
|---|---|---|
| 34 | Sāḥirun ʿalīm | Al-malaʾ — the chiefs |
| 35 | Yurīdu an yukhrijakum min arḍikum | The same group |
A point of word order: the two sentences come one after the other and the pronoun changes. In the first, hādhā (this) — Moses as an object. In the second, twice kum — yukhrija-kum, arḍi-kum. The threat is thus shifted onto the listener: "you", "your land".
And the word arḍikum must be recorded: Moses was born on that soil, and Pharaoh said so with his own mouth in the eighteenth verse (wa labithta fīnā min ʿumurika sinīn). Now the same soil is described as "yours" and Moses is counted an outsider.
I record this as an observation: in the same conversation the same person is presented first as an insider (we raised you) and then as an outsider (he will drive you from your land). Two descriptions serving two different purposes.
This sentence is one of the most striking points of word order in the sūra, and it carries a judgement on its own.
تَأْمُرُونَ — from the root amr: to command. Pharaoh does not say to the chiefs "what do you think?" (mādhā tarawn) or "what is your opinion?" (mā raʾyukum). He says "what do you command?"
One verse earlier he had said of himself ilāhan ghayrī ("a god other than me") (29). Five verses later he asks those around him "what do you command?"
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the distance between the two words within the sūra: six verses stand between the claim to divinity and the sentence of consultation. The text does not interpret this tension — it sets the two side by side.
And the same scene occurs with the same word elsewhere in the Qurʾān: al-Aʿrāf 7/110 — fa-mādhā taʾmurūn. The sentence is thus exactly the same in two sūras. This is a datum that can be verified from the text.
| Root | Sense | The sentence's meaning |
|---|---|---|
| ر-ج-و / ر-ج-أ (arjaʾa) | To postpone, to delay | "Keep him waiting" — do not decide, stall |
| ر-ج-و (irjāʾ, deferral) | To detain | "Hold him" |
Both readings converge on "do nothing immediately". Variant readings of the word are also transmitted (arjih, arjihi, arjiʾhu); these are differences of pronunciation and do not change the meaning, so I do not go into their detail.
And the advice given is worth recording: the chiefs propose neither killing nor imprisonment. What they propose is a counter-display: to gather the experts of the same field and have the same work done.
حَٰشِرِين — root ح-ش-ر: to gather in one place what is scattered. The root was analysed at al-Takwīr 81/5 and in Qāf. The word is used in the context of the resurrection too (ḥashr), and its use here is concrete: officials going city by city to collect men.
سَحَّار — root س-ح-ر, the faʿʿāl pattern: an intensive — one who does the thing much and continually. In the thirty-fourth verse sāḥir (an active participle) was used of Moses; here saḥḥār is used of the men who are to be brought.
| Verse | Word | Pattern | Of whom |
|---|---|---|---|
| 34 | sāḥir | Active participle | Moses |
| 37 | saḥḥār | Faʿʿāl — intensive | The sorcerers to be brought |
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the difference of the two patterns: the other side's logic of bringing "a bigger one" is reflected in the pattern of the word. The answer is thus built on degree, not on kind.
And the core of the root س-ح-ر must be recorded: the lexicographers describe the root as "to turn a thing away from its true direction, to turn the eye or the perception". From the same root: سَحَر (saḥar) — the end of the night, the hour of turning toward day. Sorcery, then, changes not the reality but the perception — and this will be confirmed in the forty-fifth verse in the text's own words: talqafu mā yaʾfikūn — "it was swallowing what they were fabricating".
فَجُمِعَ ٱلسَّحَرَةُ لِمِيقَٰتِ يَوْمٍ مَّعْلُومٍ · وَقِيلَ لِلنَّاسِ هَلْ أَنتُم مُّجْتَمِعُونَ · لَعَلَّنَا نَتَّبِعُ ٱلسَّحَرَةَ إِن كَانُوا۟ هُمُ ٱلْغَٰلِبِينَ · فَلَمَّا جَآءَ ٱلسَّحَرَةُ قَالُوا۟ لِفِرْعَوْنَ أَئِنَّ لَنَا لَأَجْرًا إِن كُنَّا نَحْنُ ٱلْغَٰلِبِينَ · قَالَ نَعَمْ وَإِنَّكُمْ إِذًا لَّمِنَ ٱلْمُقَرَّبِينَ
Fa-jumiʿa's-saḥaratu li-mīqāti yawmin maʿlūm · Wa qīla li'n-nāsi hal antum mujtamiʿūn · Laʿallanā nattabiʿu's-saḥarata in kānū humu'l-ghālibīn · Fa-lammā jāʾa's-saḥaratu qālū li-Firʿawna a-inna lanā la-ajran in kunnā naḥnu'l-ghālibīn · Qāla naʿam wa innakum idhan la-mina'l-muqarrabīn
"And so the sorcerers were gathered for the appointed hour of a known day. · And it was said to the people: 'Will you gather too? · Perhaps we shall follow the sorcerers — if they are the ones who prevail.' · When the sorcerers came they said to Pharaoh: 'Will there really be a wage for us if we are the ones who prevail?' · 'Yes', he said, 'and then you will certainly be among those brought near.'"
In the first three of the five verses the verbs are passive: jumiʿa (were gathered), qīla (it was said). The agent is not named.
A point of word order: the passive voice, as it hides the one who acts, also announces the breadth of the act. Gatherers had been sent city by city (36), the sorcerers had been brought, the people had been summoned. All of this is fitted into a single verb.
مِيقَٰت — root و-ق-ت: an appointed time. Mīqāt is not "a time" but "a meeting whose time is fixed"; the word has this sense in the terms of the pilgrimage too.
And yawmin maʿlūm — "a known day". The Qurʾān does not say what day this event was. At Ṭāhā 20/59 Moses' own proposal occurs: mawʿidukum yawmu'z-zīnati wa an yuḥshara'n-nāsu ḍuḥā — "your appointment is the day of adornment (the festival); let the people be gathered in the forenoon". Al-Shuʿarāʾ does not give this detail; Ṭāhā does. The two texts do not conflict; one is shorter than the other.
I do not enter into detail the Qurʾān does not give; reports are transmitted about which festival it was and how many sorcerers came, but they are not in the Qurʾān.
The sentence stands as a question but its work is a summons. In Arabic the interrogative pattern can be used for urging. The English "will you gather?" carries the same doubleness.
And what must be recorded is this: the display is open to the public. It is held not in a closed hall but before a crowd. This is what will determine the outcome of the scene: when the sorcerers fall prostrate in the forty-sixth verse, the whole people will see it.
| Reading | Who says it | Ground |
|---|---|---|
| Those making the summons | The officials / Pharaoh's side | It is the continuation of the same sentence as qīla li'n-nās |
| The people themselves | The gathered crowd | The verb is first person plural (nattabiʿu) |
But the content of the sentence, whichever reading is taken, says the same thing, and it must be recorded: in kānū humu'l-ghālibīn — "if they are the ones who prevail". The measure is not truth but victory.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the word: the sentence does not say "if they turn out to be in the right" or "if they speak the truth". Whoever wins the contest is to be followed. And ten verses after setting up this sentence, the sūra will recount that the winners of the contest themselves changed sides (46-48). The measure thus breaks itself.
The root غ-ل-ب: to prevail, to overcome. The word occurs three times in the sūra (40, 41, 44), and all three times it belongs to the side of the sorcerers: twice the expectation of the people or the sorcerers, once their own oath. There is no fourth occurrence — because they do not prevail. This is a datum that can be verified from the text.
And in the sūra five prophets will say the same sentence five times: wa mā asʾalukum ʿalayhi min ajrin (109, 127, 145, 164, 180) — "I ask you no wage for it".
| The sorcerers 26/41 | The five prophets (109, 127, 145, 164, 180) | |
|---|---|---|
| Word | ajr | ajr |
| Verb | A-inna lanā — "is there for us?" | Mā asʾalukum — "I do not ask" |
| From whom | From Pharaoh | From no one |
| Its return | Mina'l-muqarrabīn — to be brought near | ʿAlā rabbi'l-ʿālamīn — it falls upon the Lord |
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is that the same word (ajr) occurs six times in the sūra: once asked for, five times refused. And the sūra will recount that those who asked for the wage in the end gave the wage up (50-51). The word ajr is thus a separator in the sūra: it measures who is speaking in return for what.
The root ق-ر-ب: to be near. Muqarrab — the passive participle of Form II: brought near, taken into proximity.
| Use | Example | Nearness to whom |
|---|---|---|
| The language of the court | Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/42 — Pharaoh's promise | To the ruler |
| The language of the hereafter | Al-Wāqiʿa 56/11 (ulāʾika'l-muqarrabūn), al-Muṭaffifīn 83/21 | To God |
This word was analysed in al-Wāqiʿa and in al-Muṭaffifīn, and I do not repeat it.
What is to be added here is an observation: Pharaoh answers the question about the wage with "yes" and adds something on top of it — nearness. What is offered, then, is not money but position. And a few verses later the sorcerers will refuse that position: lā ḍayra innā ilā rabbinā munqalibūn (50). What was set before them was a position; what they left behind was a position too.
قَالَ لَهُم مُّوسَىٰٓ أَلْقُوا۟ مَآ أَنتُم مُّلْقُونَ · فَأَلْقَوْا۟ حِبَالَهُمْ وَعِصِيَّهُمْ وَقَالُوا۟ بِعِزَّةِ فِرْعَوْنَ إِنَّا لَنَحْنُ ٱلْغَٰلِبُونَ · فَأَلْقَىٰ مُوسَىٰ عَصَاهُ فَإِذَا هِىَ تَلْقَفُ مَا يَأْفِكُونَ · فَأُلْقِىَ ٱلسَّحَرَةُ سَٰجِدِينَ · قَالُوٓا۟ ءَامَنَّا بِرَبِّ ٱلْعَٰلَمِينَ · رَبِّ مُوسَىٰ وَهَٰرُونَ · قَالَ ءَامَنتُمْ لَهُۥ قَبْلَ أَنْ ءَاذَنَ لَكُمْ … لَأُقَطِّعَنَّ أَيْدِيَكُمْ وَأَرْجُلَكُم مِّنْ خِلَٰفٍ وَلَأُصَلِّبَنَّكُمْ أَجْمَعِينَ
Qāla lahum Mūsā alqū mā antum mulqūn · Fa-alqaw ḥibālahum wa ʿiṣiyyahum wa qālū bi-ʿizzati Firʿawna innā la-naḥnu'l-ghālibūn · Fa-alqā Mūsā ʿaṣāhu fa-idhā hiya talqafu mā yaʾfikūn · Fa-ulqiya's-saḥaratu sājidīn · Qālū āmannā bi-rabbi'l-ʿālamīn · Rabbi Mūsā wa Hārūn · Qāla āmantum lahu qabla an ādhana lakum… la-uqaṭṭiʿanna aydiyakum wa arjulakum min khilāfin wa la-uṣallibannakum ajmaʿīn
"Moses said to them: 'Cast what you are going to cast!' · So they cast their ropes and their staffs and said: 'By the might of Pharaoh, we are surely the ones who prevail!' · Then Moses cast his staff; and there it was, swallowing what they had fabricated! · Thereupon the sorcerers were thrown down prostrate. · They said: 'We believe in the Lord of all the worlds — the Lord of Moses and Aaron.' · [Pharaoh] said: 'You believed him before I gave you leave!… I will surely cut off your hands and your feet on opposite sides, and I will surely crucify you all!'"
The clearest structural datum of this section is the repetition of a single root. The root ل-ق-ي (to cast) occurs six times in seven verses, and its relative ل-ق-ف once:
| Verse | Word | Who casts | Mood |
|---|---|---|---|
| 43 | alqū | The sorcerers | Imperative — from Moses' mouth |
| 43 | mulqūn | The sorcerers | Active participle |
| 44 | fa-alqaw | The sorcerers | Perfect |
| 45 | fa-alqā | Moses | Perfect |
| 45 | talqafu | The staff | Imperfect — ل-ق-ف |
| 46 | fa-ulqiya | The sorcerers | Passive |
For four verses the sorcerers were the side that casts; in the forty-sixth verse they become the side that is cast: fa-ulqiya's-saḥaratu sājidīn — "the sorcerers were thrown down prostrate".
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the change of voice: fa-sajada's-saḥaratu ("they prostrated themselves") could have been said; it was not. The passive voice announces that the prostration was not a planned decision but an irresistible reaction — as though something set them down. The same mould occurs at al-Aʿrāf 7/120 as well (wa ulqiya's-saḥaratu sājidīn).
تَلْقَفُ — root ل-ق-ف: to snatch a thing up quickly and swallow it. Laqifa — to catch something in the air. The word says not "it destroyed" but "it swallowed": it took it in as a body.
The sorcerers swear an oath, and what they swear by must be recorded: ʿizzatu Firʿawn — the might of Pharaoh.
The root ع-ز-ز is the root of the name al-ʿAzīz in the seal of the sūra (9, 68, 104, 122, 140, 159, 175, 191), and it was analysed in Fāṭir. Its core: hardness, resistance to wear, invincibility.
The sūra thus uses the same word eight times of God and once of Pharaoh. This is a datum that can be verified from the text.
And this is another instance of the technique recorded in al-Burūj: the Qurʾān takes the attribute the other side has assigned to itself and returns it to its true owner. The sorcerers swear by the ʿizza of Pharaoh; at the end of every account the sūra stamps its seal, "the true ʿazīz is your Lord". I record this link as a reading of the Qurʾān by the Qurʾān.
A point of word order: the oath is sworn before the miracle takes place, and it carries three elements announcing certainty: innā + la- + naḥnu (the separating pronoun) + al-ghālibūn (definite). In Arabic this is one of the highest degrees of certainty. In English: "we, we most certainly are the ones who prevail."
The root أ-ف-ك: to turn a thing from its direction, to overturn it. Ifk — a turned-about speech, a slander. The root was treated at al-Jāthiya 45/7 and at al-Aḥqāf 46/11, 46/28.
| Verse | Word | Of whom |
|---|---|---|
| 45 | mā yaʾfikūn | The sorcerers — what they fabricate |
| 222 | affākin athīm | The one the satans come down upon |
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the shared root: the sūra names the sorcerer's work and the affāk's work with the same root — both turn a thing away from its true direction. And at the end of the sūra it will be said that the source of the Qurʾān does not come from this field (210-212). The sūra thus builds its own defence here, between a staff and some ropes.
And a point of word order: the verse does not say "it swallowed their ropes". Talqafu mā yaʾfikūn — "it was swallowing what they were fabricating". What is swallowed is not an object but an act.
The forty-seventh verse is a declaration of faith; the forty-eighth adds an explanation to it: rabbi Mūsā wa Hārūn.
Why this was added has been disputed, and there is an explanation from within the text. I record it as my own reading: the expression rabbu'l-ʿālamīn is one that Pharaoh could appropriate to himself — indeed Pharaoh had said of himself ilāhan ghayrī (29), and in another sūra the Qurʾān records him saying anā rabbukumu'l-aʿlā (al-Nāziʿāt 79/24 — treated in al-Nāziʿāt). The addition in the forty-eighth verse closes off the possibility: which Lord is meant is specified by name.
One — qabla an ādhana lakum ("before I gave you leave"). Faith is spoken of as a matter subject to permission.
I record this as an observation: the sentence shows what the claim to divinity amounts to. The claim includes not being worshipped but the authority to decide who will believe in what.
And here āmantum lahu occurs — lahu, not bihi. In Arabic āmana bi- is "to believe in a thing", āmana li- is "to trust someone, to hold him true". Pharaoh therefore does not say "you have believed in God"; he says "you have trusted him" — again pulling the subject onto the person.
Two — innahu la-kabīrukumu'lladhī ʿallamakumu's-siḥr ("he is your chief, who taught you sorcery"). The event, in other words, is explained as a conspiracy: master and pupils had come to an understanding.
This is the continuation of the naming in the thirty-fourth verse. An event that cannot be denied is explained by a known cause. And there is a problem inside the explanation, and the text makes no attempt to repair it: the sorcerers had only just been gathered from the cities (36-38), and Moses had not been in Egypt for years (21). The text does not point out this contradiction; it sets it before the reader. I record this as an observation.
The root خ-ل-ف: the back, the opposite, what takes another's place. Min khilāf — on opposite sides: the right hand with the left foot, or the reverse.
The punishment is described in detail in the text: cutting off and crucifixion. The Qurʾān records the same threat in the same words at al-Aʿrāf 7/124 and Ṭāhā 20/71 as well.
I enter a note, and it follows from the principle of this commentary: the verse establishes no penal ruling; it transmits the words of a tyrant. The difference between transmission and ruling is plain here — the sentence is in Pharaoh's mouth, and the sūra does not endorse it. I derive no legal ruling from it.
قَالُوا۟ لَا ضَيْرَ ۖ إِنَّآ إِلَىٰ رَبِّنَا مُنقَلِبُونَ · إِنَّا نَطْمَعُ أَن يَغْفِرَ لَنَا رَبُّنَا خَطَٰيَٰنَآ أَن كُنَّآ أَوَّلَ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ
Qālū lā ḍayra; innā ilā rabbinā munqalibūn · Innā naṭmaʿu an yaghfira lanā rabbunā khaṭāyānā an kunnā awwala'l-muʾminīn
"They said: 'No harm! We are returning to our Lord. · We hope that our Lord will forgive us our faults, because we are the first of the believers.'"
The threat contained three things: cutting off, crucifixion, all of them. The answer begins with two words: lā ḍayra — "no harm".
| Element | Expression | Its work |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Lā ḍayra | The refusal itself — the threat is not weighed |
| 2 | Innā ilā rabbinā munqalibūn | The ground — the place of arrival |
| 3 | Innā naṭmaʿu an yaghfira lanā | Hope — the reckoning of the past |
The answer is thus built in three steps: refusal, ground, hope. And the ground takes up not the content of the threat but its outcome.
And the kind of lā must be recorded: lā al-nāfiya li'l-jins — the lā that negates the whole class. In Arabic this pattern means "there is no harm whatever"; it does not say "there is a little harm" or "this harm is unimportant". The concept of harm itself is lifted away.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the pattern: the answer does not say "we will bear the pain". It says "this is not a harm" — that is, the measure the threat rests on is rejected. Cutting off and crucifixion are a harm only if the body is the final value.
The root was analysed in al-Inshiqāq and I do not repeat it. The description there: ق-ل-ب — to turn a thing over, to bring its underside up; from the same root قَلْب (qalb, the heart) — the thing that turns most from state to state. إِنقَلَبَ (Form VII, infiʿāl) — it turned, it turned back.
One — the word will return in the last verse of the sūra. Verse two hundred and twenty-seven: wa sa-yaʿlamu'lladhīna ẓalamū ayya munqalabin yanqalibūn — "those who did wrong will soon know to what place of return they will return".
| Verse | Expression | Of whom | Tone |
|---|---|---|---|
| 50 | Innā ilā rabbinā munqalibūn | The sorcerers — of themselves | Confidence |
| 227 | Ayya munqalabin yanqalibūn | Those who do wrong — third person | Warning |
The sūra thus uses the same root at its two ends: one speaks knowing the place of return, the other does not know it. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
Two — the use of the active participle. Munqalibūn — not "those who will return" but "those who are returning". In Arabic the active participle can announce a state already realised or already settled. The return is therefore recounted not as an event to happen in the future but as the present position.
Three — its relative in the Qurʾān. Wa innā ilā rabbinā la-munqalibūn (al-Zukhruf 43/14) — the prayer said when mounted on a beast. That passage was treated at al-Zukhruf 43/13-14. The same sentence, in two sūras in two different scenes: one setting out on a journey, the other under threat of execution. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text, and it shows what the word announces: every movement has a point of arrival.
| Reading | Its meaning | Ground |
|---|---|---|
| The first of that assembly | The first to believe among those present | The scene is an assembly for a display; the people had gathered (39) |
| The first of Egypt | The first to believe among the people of Pharaoh | The verse sets no limit |
| The first of those outside Moses' people | The Children of Israel had already believed | It is not stated openly in the text |
I do not impose a preference. What is to be recorded is this: men who a few minutes earlier were asking Pharaoh for a wage now describe themselves as "the first of the believers" — and they say it not as a boast but as the ground of a hope of forgiveness.
The root ط-م-ع: to want something intensely, to have one's eye on it. In Arabic the word often carries a negative colouring (covetousness); here it is used for a hope that is positive.
And the same word will occur once more in the sūra — in Abraham's mouth: wa'lladhī aṭmaʿu an yaghfira lī khaṭīʾatī yawma'd-dīn (82).
| Verse | Who | Expression |
|---|---|---|
| 51 | The sorcerers | Innā naṭmaʿu an yaghfira lanā rabbunā khaṭāyānā |
| 82 | Abraham | Wa'lladhī aṭmaʿu an yaghfira lī khaṭīʾatī |
The two sentences are almost exactly the same: the same verb (ṭamaʿ), the same request (an yaghfira), the same root (خ-ط-ء). There are two differences: the sorcerers are plural (naṭmaʿu, lanā, khaṭāyānā), Abraham singular (aṭmaʿu, lī, khaṭīʾatī).
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the overlap of the two sentences: the sūra builds the prayer of a prophet and the prayer of men who were sorcerers an hour before out of the same words. It observes no difference of rank between them. This is a datum that can be verified from the text; what it means is interpretation.
What the scene records is not a change of opinion. Men who came for a wage give up, within a few minutes, the wage, the position and life itself. And in doing so their being experts in their own trade plays its part: they knew better than anyone in that assembly what the thing they saw was not.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the thirty-seventh verse: those brought were saḥḥārin ʿalīm, that is, "knowing" sorcerers. Here knowledge becomes the cause not of resistance but of surrender.
وَأَوْحَيْنَآ إِلَىٰ مُوسَىٰٓ أَنْ أَسْرِ بِعِبَادِىٓ إِنَّكُم مُّتَّبَعُونَ · فَأَرْسَلَ فِرْعَوْنُ فِى ٱلْمَدَآئِنِ حَٰشِرِينَ · إِنَّ هَٰٓؤُلَآءِ لَشِرْذِمَةٌ قَلِيلُونَ · وَإِنَّهُمْ لَنَا لَغَآئِظُونَ · وَإِنَّا لَجَمِيعٌ حَٰذِرُونَ · فَأَخْرَجْنَٰهُم مِّن جَنَّٰتٍ وَعُيُونٍ · وَكُنُوزٍ وَمَقَامٍ كَرِيمٍ · كَذَٰلِكَ ۖ وَأَوْرَثْنَٰهَا بَنِىٓ إِسْرَٰٓءِيلَ
Wa awḥaynā ilā Mūsā an asri bi-ʿibādī innakum muttabaʿūn · Fa-arsala Firʿawnu fi'l-madāʾini ḥāshirīn · Inna hāʾulāʾi la-shirdhimatun qalīlūn · Wa innahum lanā la-ghāʾiẓūn · Wa innā la-jamīʿun ḥādhirūn · Fa-akhrajnāhum min jannātin wa ʿuyūn · Wa kunūzin wa maqāmin karīm · Kadhālika wa awrathnāhā banī Isrāʾīl
"And We revealed to Moses: 'Set out by night with My servants; you will be pursued.' · Pharaoh sent gatherers into the cities: · 'These are a paltry little band; · and they are enraging us; · and we are a company on our guard.' · So We brought them out of gardens and springs, · out of treasures and a noble station. · So it was; and We made the Children of Israel inherit them."
The root س-ر-ي: to travel by night. Isrāʾ — a journey by night (the asrā of al-Isrāʾ 17/1 is from the same root). The word contains no daytime travel; the time is inside the root.
And a point of word order: bi-ʿibādī — "with My servants". The Children of Israel are named here not as "your people" or "them" but as "My servants".
I record this as an observation, and it ties to the whole of the sūra: in the twenty-second verse Moses had said to Pharaoh "you made slaves of the Children of Israel" (ʿabbadta). Now the same root occurs for the same community but with a different attribution: ʿibādī — My servants.
The same root, two attributions. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text. And as my own reading I record this: the sūra speaks not of the abolition of servitude but of the changing of its direction. Deliverance is recounted not as being bound to no one but as the correction of whom one is bound to. This is an explanation, not a ruling.
A point of word order: the pursuit is announced before it happens, and in the passive: muttabaʿūn — "you are the pursued".
The command to depart therefore does not hide the danger. This resembles the mould recorded at al-Qaṣaṣ 28/7-13 in the announcement given to the mother: the command is not left bare; what will happen is said.
The root ش-ر-ذ-م: the sense the lexicographers give is a small piece broken off a whole, a paltry group. Shirdhima — a group few in number and scattered.
And a point of word order must be recorded: shirdhimatun qalīlūn. Shirdhima already means "a paltry group"; on top of it qalīlūn ("few") is added. The fewness is thus said twice.
A grammatical note: shirdhima is feminine singular, while its adjective is a sound masculine plural (qalīlūn). This is an ordinary usage with collective nouns — the adjective looks to the individuals of the group.
And the work of the sentence must be recorded: Pharaoh describes as small the community after which he is sending an army. If they are small, why is an army needed? The text does not ask this question; it sets the sentences side by side, and the next verse shows the contradiction of itself: innā la-jamīʿun ḥādhirūn — "we are a company on our guard".
| Verse | Expression | What it announces |
|---|---|---|
| 54 | La-shirdhimatun qalīlūn | They are few |
| 55 | Wa innahum lanā la-ghāʾiẓūn | They are enraging us |
| 56 | Wa innā la-jamīʿun ḥādhirūn | We are on our guard |
All three sentences are reinforced with inna + lām. All three, that is, are set down as firm claims.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the sequence of the three sentences: the first belittles the other side, the third calls its own side to be on guard. Contempt and precaution cannot be spoken in the same breath — and the text shows this without criticism, merely by setting them in order.
غَآئِظُون — root غ-ي-ظ: anger that seethes within. The lexicographers describe ghayẓ as anger that is not let out, that gathers in the breast; in this it is distinguished from ghaḍab.
حَٰذِرُون — root ح-ذ-ر: to be on one's guard, to take care. Two variant readings are transmitted for the word: ḥādhirūn (active participle — on guard) and ḥadhirūn (assimilate adjective, ṣifa mushabbaha — continually on guard, wary). There is a difference of sense, but a small one: the one announces being on guard at that moment, the other a wariness that has become a trait. Both are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.
In the thirty-fifth verse Pharaoh had said: yurīdu an yukhrijakum min arḍikum — "he wants to drive you out of your land".
What happens in the fifty-seventh verse is this: fa-akhrajnāhum min jannātin wa ʿuyūn — "We brought them out of gardens and springs".
| 26/35 — Pharaoh's fear | 26/57 — What happened | |
|---|---|---|
| Verb | Yukhrija (Form IV) | Akhrajnā (Form IV) |
| Agent | Moses (as claimed) | God |
| Object | kum — you | hum — them |
| From where | Min arḍikum — from your land | Min jannātin wa ʿuyūn — from gardens and springs |
The same root, the same form, the reverse direction. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
And at al-Dukhān 44/25-28 the same event is recounted in the same words (kam tarakū min jannātin wa ʿuyūn) and was treated there. The difference here is the verb: al-Dukhān says "they left behind", al-Shuʿarāʾ says "We brought out". One recounts an abandoning, the other a driving out.
| Order | Word | What |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Jannāt | Gardens — production |
| 2 | ʿUyūn | Springs — water |
| 3 | Kunūz | Treasures — accumulated wealth |
| 4 | Maqāmin karīm | A noble station — standing |
And the attribute karīm was used of plants in the seventh verse of the sūra (min kulli zawjin karīm). The sūra thus gives the same attribute both to what the earth gives and to what man loses. This is a repetition that can be verified from the text.
And this is the fulfilment of the promise treated at al-Qaṣaṣ 28/1-6. The sentence recorded there was this: wa najʿalahumu'l-wārithīn (al-Qaṣaṣ 28/5) — "and make them the inheritors". The same root, the same community, the same promise.
| Sūra | Expression | Mood |
|---|---|---|
| Al-Qaṣaṣ 28/5 | Wa najʿalahumu'l-wārithīn | Imperfect — it announces a will |
| Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/59 | Wa awrathnāhā banī Isrāʾīl | Perfect — realised |
This is an overlap that can be verified from the text, and it is the counterpart of the promise of "the reversal of position" recorded in al-Qaṣaṣ.
كَذَٰلِكَ — "so it was". A one-word fragment of a verse; the lexicographers explain it as a mark that seals the preceding scene.
فَأَتْبَعُوهُم مُّشْرِقِينَ · فَلَمَّا تَرَٰٓءَا ٱلْجَمْعَانِ قَالَ أَصْحَٰبُ مُوسَىٰٓ إِنَّا لَمُدْرَكُونَ · قَالَ كَلَّآ ۖ إِنَّ مَعِىَ رَبِّى سَيَهْدِينِ · فَأَوْحَيْنَآ إِلَىٰ مُوسَىٰٓ أَنِ ٱضْرِب بِّعَصَاكَ ٱلْبَحْرَ ۖ فَٱنفَلَقَ فَكَانَ كُلُّ فِرْقٍ كَٱلطَّوْدِ ٱلْعَظِيمِ · وَأَزْلَفْنَا ثَمَّ ٱلْءَاخَرِينَ · وَأَنجَيْنَا مُوسَىٰ وَمَن مَّعَهُۥٓ أَجْمَعِينَ · ثُمَّ أَغْرَقْنَا ٱلْءَاخَرِينَ · إِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ لَءَايَةً ۖ وَمَا كَانَ أَكْثَرُهُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ · وَإِنَّ رَبَّكَ لَهُوَ ٱلْعَزِيزُ ٱلرَّحِيمُ
Fa-atbaʿūhum mushriqīn · Fa-lammā tarāʾa'l-jamʿāni qāla aṣḥābu Mūsā innā la-mudrakūn · Qāla kallā; inna maʿiya rabbī sa-yahdīn · Fa-awḥaynā ilā Mūsā ani'ḍrib bi-ʿaṣāka'l-baḥr; fa'nfalaqa fa-kāna kullu firqin ka'ṭ-ṭawdi'l-ʿaẓīm · Wa azlafnā thamma'l-ākharīn · Wa anjaynā Mūsā wa man maʿahu ajmaʿīn · Thumma aghraqna'l-ākharīn · Inna fī dhālika la-āyatan wa mā kāna aktharuhum muʾminīn · Wa inna rabbaka la-huwa'l-ʿazīzu'r-raḥīm
"They pursued them as the sun rose. · When the two hosts came in sight of one another, the men of Moses said: 'We are overtaken!' · 'No!' he said, 'my Lord is with me; He will guide me.' · Thereupon We revealed to Moses: 'Strike the sea with your staff.' It parted, and every part was like a great mountain. · And We brought the others near to that place. · And We saved Moses and all who were with him; · then We drowned the others. · In this there is surely a sign; but most of them were not believers. · And your Lord — He indeed — is the Mighty, the Merciful."
The root ش-ر-ق: the rising of the sun. Mushriqīn — an active participle announcing a circumstance: "in the state of having entered upon sunrise", that is, as day broke.
And a point of word order: in the fifty-second verse the departure had been by the command asri (travel by night). Now the pursuit is at the hour of mushriqīn (as the sun rises). The text thus separates the movement of the two sides by time: one set out at night, the other went after them in the morning.
A caution: the word is mushriqīn (ش-ر-ق, to rise) and not mushrikīn (ش-ر-ك, to associate partners). The two words are easily confused in transliteration; their roots are different.
تَرَآءَىٰ — Form VI (tafāʿala): reciprocity. Tarāʾa'l-jamʿān — "the two hosts saw one another". Not a one-sided seeing.
ٱلْجَمْعَان — dual: two hosts. And the word is from the same root as the word Pharaoh used of his own side in the fifty-sixth verse: innā la-jamīʿun ḥādhirūn.
The root د-ر-ك: to catch up with, to reach, to overtake. Mudrak — passive participle: overtaken, caught.
A point of word order: the sentence is reinforced with inna + lām — the fear, that is, is put not as a possibility but as a certainty: "we are overtaken."
And the side that speaks must be recorded: aṣḥābu Mūsā — "the men of Moses". Here the sūra does not say "his people" or "the Children of Israel". In the fifty-second verse the same community had been named ʿibādī ("My servants"). Three different names, three different contexts: servants (in relation to God), men (in relation to Moses), the Children of Israel (by lineage).
| Verse | Who says it | To whom | What it rejects |
|---|---|---|---|
| 15 | God | To Moses | An yaqtulūn — the fear of being killed |
| 62 | Moses | To his people | Innā la-mudrakūn — the fear of being overtaken |
Moses, that is, says to his people the word that was said to him. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
And the continuation of the sentence must be recorded: inna maʿiya rabbī. In the fifteenth verse the guarantee was innā maʿakum mustamiʿūn ("we are with you"). Now Moses repeats the same word with a singular pronoun: "my Lord is with me."
A point of word order: Moses does not say "He will save us" or "He will part the sea". He says "He will guide me". He does not know the solution; he knows that he will be guided.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the choice of the verb: the revelation comes in the next verse (63). At the moment he framed the sentence, then, Moses did not yet know the solution. The text does not say this openly; the sequence shows it.
And the same verb will occur once more in the sūra — in Abraham's mouth: alladhī khalaqanī fa-huwa yahdīn (78). Two prophets use the same verb in the same pattern. This link will be treated in the section on 78-82.
The root ف-ل-ق: to split a thing in two, to cleave. From the same root: falaq (the cleaving of the dawn — analysed in al-Falaq) and fāliqu'l-ḥabbi wa'n-nawā (al-Anʿām 6/95 — the splitter of the grain).
Form VII (infaʿala) must be recorded: infalaqa — it parted of itself. In Arabic this form announces the result without bringing the agent of the verb forward.
The verse therefore does not say "God parted the sea"; the command "strike with your staff" is given, and it is said "it parted". No agent is named between the command and the result.
The root ط-و-د: a high and unshakeable mountain. Ṭawd, unlike an ordinary mountain (jabal), announces height and immovability.
The work of the comparison must be recorded: the verse says the water divided in two and likens the divided parts to a mountain. There are two points to the respect in which the comparison is made: height and stillness. The water comes into a state of not flowing and standing high — that is, the reverse of its own nature.
I record this as an observation; I set up no explanation in physics of how the water stood. No hunting for scientific miracles is done in this commentary (Method).
The root ز-ل-ف: to bring near, to draw close. The same root will occur once more in the sūra: wa uzlifati'l-jannatu li'l-muttaqīn (90) — "the garden was brought near to those who guard themselves".
| Verse | Expression | Brought near to whom | What |
|---|---|---|---|
| 64 | Wa azlafnā thamma'l-ākharīn | The others | The sea / destruction |
| 90 | Wa uzlifati'l-jannatu li'l-muttaqīn | Those who guard themselves | The garden |
ثَمَّ — "there" (an adverb of place). It must not be confused with thumma ("then"); its vowelling and its meaning are different. They occur not in the same verse but two verses apart: thamma (64) and thumma (66).
The arrangement of the three verses is therefore this: bringing near → saving → drowning. The saving stands in the middle; the drowning is recounted only after the saving is complete.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the order. And the same order is present in the section on Noah recorded in al-Ṣāffāt: first the deliverance, then the end of the other side.
أَجْمَعِين — "all together". The word announces the completeness of the deliverance: no one was left behind.
The second seal of the sūra. The mould and its function were treated in the section on 26/8-9; I do not repeat them.
The only thing to be added here is an observation about position: the seal closes, at the end of the account of Moses, a telling of fifty-seven verses — the longest block in the sūra. And the seal refers to no detail of the account: inna fī dhālika la-āyatan — "in this there is a sign". What dhālika points to is not said.
This is what makes it possible for the seal to remain the same eight times: because the demonstrative is left indefinite, it can be set unchanged at the end of every account. I record this as an observation about the structure.
Thirty-six verses. And the second account that does not fit the mould of the sūra: no kadhdhabat … al-mursalīn, no akhūhum, no threefold introduction. There is only the seal (103-104).
But the account itself does something different from all the other accounts of the sūra: at its end the fate of the people is not recounted. Noah's people are drowned, ʿĀd is destroyed, Thamūd is seized, the people of Lot are wiped out, the people of al-Ayka are taken by the punishment of the shadow. What happened to Abraham's people is not said.
In its place the account moves to the scene of the gathering (87-102). It shows the punishment, that is, not in this world but in the next.
I record this as an observation, and it can be verified from the text: in six of the seven accounts the outcome is worldly; in the account of Abraham the outcome is otherworldly.
| Part | Verses | Subject |
|---|---|---|
| A | 69-77 | The dispute — the idols, the proof from hearing, the forefathers |
| B | 78-89 | The confession and the prayer — the five-sentence sequence and six petitions |
| C | 90-104 | The scene of the gathering — the garden, the fire, the dispute, the seal |
وَٱتْلُ عَلَيْهِمْ نَبَأَ إِبْرَٰهِيمَ · إِذْ قَالَ لِأَبِيهِ وَقَوْمِهِۦ مَا تَعْبُدُونَ · قَالُوا۟ نَعْبُدُ أَصْنَامًا فَنَظَلُّ لَهَا عَٰكِفِينَ · قَالَ هَلْ يَسْمَعُونَكُمْ إِذْ تَدْعُونَ · أَوْ يَنفَعُونَكُمْ أَوْ يَضُرُّونَ · قَالُوا۟ بَلْ وَجَدْنَآ ءَابَآءَنَا كَذَٰلِكَ يَفْعَلُونَ
Wa'tlu ʿalayhim nabaʾa Ibrāhīm · Idh qāla li-abīhi wa qawmihi mā taʿbudūn · Qālū naʿbudu aṣnāman fa-naẓallu lahā ʿākifīn · Qāla hal yasmaʿūnakum idh tadʿūn · Aw yanfaʿūnakum aw yaḍurrūn · Qālū bal wajadnā ābāʾanā kadhālika yafʿalūn
"Recite to them the tidings of Abraham as well. · When he said to his father and his people: 'What is it you serve?' · They said: 'We serve idols, and we keep standing before them.' · He said: 'Do they hear you when you call? · Or do they bring you benefit or harm?' · They said: 'No, but we found our forefathers doing so.'"
The account opens with a command, and the addressee of the command is neither Moses nor Abraham but the one the sūra addresses: "recite to them".
The level of the telling therefore changes. The account of Moses had begun wa idh nādā rabbuka Mūsā — direct narrative. The account of Abraham begins with a command to deliver.
I record this as an observation: the sūra sets the reason for recounting the account at the head of the account. What is recounted is recounted in order to be recited to those addressed.
The root ت-ل-و was analysed at al-Ṣāffāt 37/3 and I do not repeat it. The basic note there: the original sense of the root is not "to recite" but "to follow after"; the sense of reciting arises from setting letters one after another.
نَبَأ — root ن-ب-أ: a great and weighty piece of news. The root was analysed in al-Nabaʾ. Ordinary news is called khabar; weighty news, nabaʾ. And the word had also occurred in the sixth verse of the sūra (anbāʾu mā kānū bihi yastahziʾūn).
Both questions are asked with مَا. And the difference must be recorded: in the twenty-third verse the use of mā was disputed, because what was asked about was a rational being. Here there is no dispute: what is asked about is stone, and mā is in place.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is that the two verses use the same particle: the sūra sets up the same question in two different mouths. One asks after the quiddity of the Lord and gets an answer; the other asks after the quiddity of the idols and gets none.
And a point of word order: Abraham does not say "whom do you serve?" but "what do you serve?" The question asks not after the identity of what is served but after its kind.
أَصْنَام — the plural of ṣanam: a carved, shaped idol. The lexicographers transmit a distinction between ṣanam and wathan: ṣanam is what has been given a shape (in the form of a human or an animal), wathan a shapeless stone. This distinction is not the same in every source; I make no firm choice.
And that the word comes indefinite must be recorded: aṣnāman. No name is given, no number. The answer, that is, does not identify what is served.
ظَلَّ — it had occurred in the fourth verse of the sūra too: fa-ẓallat aʿnāquhum lahā khāḍiʿīn. The same verb, the same construction: ẓalla + lahā + a circumstantial word.
| Verse | Expression | Who | What they do |
|---|---|---|---|
| 4 | Fa-ẓallat aʿnāquhum lahā khāḍiʿīn | The necks | They stay bowed before the sign |
| 71 | Fa-naẓallu lahā ʿākifīn | The people | They stay bent over the idols |
The same verb, the same preposition, the same construction — to two different objects. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
And as my own reading I record this: what was recounted in the fourth verse was the result of a compulsion that does not come. What is recounted in the seventy-first verse is an attachment made of one's own accord. The sūra gives the same verb once to compulsion and once to choice. That this link is intended is not stated in the text.
عَٰكِفِين — root ع-ك-ف: to stay in a place and not leave it, to remain beside a thing. From the same root: iʿtikāf (staying in the mosque). In the word there is not worship but attachment and not departing.
The people, that is, describe not the content of their worship but its duration: "we keep standing beside them." I record this as an observation.
Fāṭir 35/13-14: in tadʿūhum lā yasmaʿū duʿāʾakum wa law samiʿū ma'stajābū lakum — "if you call them they do not hear your call; and even if they heard, they could not answer you". The structure recorded there had two stages: they do not hear; and even if they heard, they could not answer.
al-Aḥqāf 46/5-6: wa man aḍallu mimman yadʿū min dūni'llāhi man lā yastajību lahu ilā yawmi'l-qiyāmati wa hum ʿan duʿāʾihim ghāfilūn — "who is further astray than one who calls, apart from God, upon those who cannot answer him until the Day of Resurrection? And they are unaware of their calling."
Al-Shuʿarāʾ's difference must be recorded: here the proof is given not as a judgement but as a question.
| Place | Mould | Who says it |
|---|---|---|
| Fāṭir 35/14 | Declarative — "they do not hear" | God, to those addressed |
| Al-Aḥqāf 46/5 | Question + judgement — "who is further astray?" | God, to those addressed |
| Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/72-73 | Question — "do they hear?" | Abraham, to his people |
In al-Shuʿarāʾ, then, the proof makes the other side supply the answer. Abraham issues no judgement; he asks.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the difference of mould in the three verses: a messenger speaking inside an account leads the one he addresses to his own answer. And the one addressed cannot give it — the next verse will show this.
| Order | Verb | What it asks |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Yasmaʿūnakum | Do they hear — communication |
| 2 | Yanfaʿūnakum | Do they bring benefit |
| 3 | Yaḍurrūn | Do they bring harm |
The object of the third verb has dropped: yaḍurrūn — "do they bring harm" (it does not say "you"). The first two verbs have the pronoun kum, the third does not.
The transmitted explanation: it was elided for the sake of the verse-ending; the object is understood from the sentence. This is an ordinary kind of ellipsis in Arabic, and similar examples were recorded in al-Raḥmān.
And the arrangement of the three verbs must be recorded: the three supports of a relation of worship are set out — being heard, gaining, fearing. When all three are negated, the relation has no support left.
And the word duʿāʾ: idh tadʿūn — root د-ع-و: to call, to summon. The word describes worship in its barest form: calling out. And at the end of the sūra those addressed will be spoken to with the same root: fa-lā tadʿu maʿa'llāhi ilāhan ākhar (213). This is a repetition that can be verified from the text.
بَلْ — in Arabic the particle of retraction (iḍrāb): leaving the preceding statement and passing to something else. The people, that is, do not even say "no, they do not hear"; they change the subject.
I record this as an observation about the structure, and the particle shows it on its own: bal is the particle for abandoning the answering of a question and passing to a new ground. What was asked for was a proof; what is given is a custom.
The proof from the forefathers was treated in detail in two places across the series, and I rely on those treatments:
al-Zukhruf 43/22-23: bal qālū innā wajadnā ābāʾanā ʿalā ummatin wa innā ʿalā āthārihim muhtadūn (22) and wa kadhālika mā arsalnā min qablika fī qaryatin min nadhīrin illā qāla mutrafūhā innā wajadnā ābāʾanā ʿalā ummatin wa innā ʿalā āthārihim muqtadūn (23). What was recorded there was this: the same sentence is repeated in two verses, and in the second it is said that this is an answer repeated in every age.
Luqmān 31/20-21: wa idhā qīla lahumu'ttabiʿū mā anzala'llāhu qālū bal nattabiʿu mā wajadnā ʿalayhi ābāʾanā. There too the same particle bal stands.
| Place | Expression | What it says |
|---|---|---|
| Al-Zukhruf 43/22 | Ābāʾanā ʿalā ummatin … innā ʿalā āthārihim muhtadūn | "They were on a way and we are rightly guided" — a claim to guidance is present |
| Luqmān 31/21 | Bal nattabiʿu mā wajadnā ʿalayhi ābāʾanā | "We follow it" — the language of choice |
| Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/74 | Bal wajadnā ābāʾanā kadhālika yafʿalūn | "We found them doing so" — observation only |
And the difference is this: in the answer in al-Shuʿarāʾ there is no claim at all. It is not said "we are rightly guided", nor "we follow them". Only a fact is announced: "they used to do so."
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the comparison of the three verses: the answer in al-Shuʿarāʾ is the barest form of the proof from the forefathers — mere continuity, with no ground. And Abraham's next words touch exactly on that bareness: wa ābāʾukumu'l-aqdamūn (76) — "and your most ancient forefathers".
قَالَ أَفَرَءَيْتُم مَّا كُنتُمْ تَعْبُدُونَ · أَنتُمْ وَءَابَآؤُكُمُ ٱلْأَقْدَمُونَ · فَإِنَّهُمْ عَدُوٌّ لِّىٓ إِلَّا رَبَّ ٱلْعَٰلَمِينَ
Qāla a-fa-raʾaytum mā kuntum taʿbudūn · Antum wa ābāʾukumu'l-aqdamūn · Fa-innahum ʿaduwwun lī illā rabba'l-ʿālamīn
"He said: 'Have you then seen what you have been serving — · you and your most ancient forefathers? · They are an enemy to me; only the Lord of all the worlds is not.'"
The pattern occurs often in the Qurʾān and was treated in this commentary in al-Najm and al-Wāqiʿa. A-raʾayta — word for word "have you seen?", but its function is "tell me, then, what do you say?". It asks not for seeing with the eye but for thinking.
And the point of word order stands here. The people had said "our forefathers" (74); Abraham adds one word to the sentence: al-aqdamūn — "the most ancient".
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the added word: the proof from the forefathers rests on continuity. Abraham does not reject the proof; he extends it. He carries the chain back to its very beginning. Because the longer the chain grows, the sharper becomes the question of what the first link rests on.
And what was recorded at al-Zukhruf 43/23 supports this reading: there it was said that the same answer is given in every age. The proof from the forefathers is thus a chain that produces itself; each generation cites the one before it as its ground, and the head of the chain is never asked after.
And the word order of the sentence must be recorded. Abraham does not say "I am an enemy to them"; he says "they are an enemy to me".
| Construction | Its meaning |
|---|---|
| Anā ʿaduwwun lahum | I am the enemy — I am the subject |
| Innahum ʿaduwwun lī | They are the enemy — they are the subject |
| Explanation | Ground |
|---|---|
| Reciprocity is meant | In Arabic enmity is two-sided; when one is said the other is understood |
| The idols do harm | What is worshipped, by leading its worshipper to the wrong place, has acted as an enemy to him |
| They will be enemies at the gathering | The Qurʾān says this openly: wa kānū bi-ʿibādatihim kāfirīn (al-Aḥqāf 46/6, treated in al-Aḥqāf) |
The third explanation has the strongest ground within the Qurʾān and accords with the sūra's own continuation as well: from the ninety-second verse onward it will be recounted that at the gathering those served are nowhere to be found.
عَدُوّ — the word comes in the singular but is the predicate of a plural group (hum). In Arabic ʿaduww is used for both singular and plural — it is a property of the faʿūl pattern; the same was said of rasūl in the sixteenth verse.
The tension is this: it is said "what you serve is an enemy to me, except the Lord of all the worlds". But the people were not serving the Lord of all the worlds.
| Explanation | Kind | Ground |
|---|---|---|
| A disjunctive exception | An exception not of the same class | In Arabic illā can come in the sense of "but rather"; "they are my enemy — but the Lord of all the worlds is not" |
| A conjunctive exception | An exception of the same class | The people were not denying God altogether; they counted the idols as bringing them near to Him (as in li-yuqarribūnā ila'llāhi zulfā, al-Zumar 39/3) |
Both explanations are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. What is to be recorded is this: from the next verse onward Abraham will describe with five sentences the party he has excepted. Who the exception is, that is, is explained immediately after.
ٱلَّذِى خَلَقَنِى فَهُوَ يَهْدِينِ · وَٱلَّذِى هُوَ يُطْعِمُنِى وَيَسْقِينِ · وَإِذَا مَرِضْتُ فَهُوَ يَشْفِينِ · وَٱلَّذِى يُمِيتُنِى ثُمَّ يُحْيِينِ · وَٱلَّذِىٓ أَطْمَعُ أَن يَغْفِرَ لِى خَطِيٓـَٔتِى يَوْمَ ٱلدِّينِ
Alladhī khalaqanī fa-huwa yahdīn · Wa'lladhī huwa yuṭʿimunī wa yasqīn · Wa idhā mariḍtu fa-huwa yashfīn · Wa'lladhī yumītunī thumma yuḥyīn · Wa'lladhī aṭmaʿu an yaghfira lī khaṭīʾatī yawma'd-dīn
"It is He who created me, and He guides me. · It is He who feeds me and gives me drink. · When I fall ill, it is He who heals me. · It is He who will cause me to die and then bring me to life. · And it is He whose forgiveness of my fault on the Day of Judgement I hope for."
The five densest verses of the sūra. Very short sentences, a single subject, five fields of action, and from beginning to end a single sound: ‑īn.
Five sentences rest on the same mould, but the mould is not fixed. The differences are in the table, and all of them are read off the text:
| # | Verse | Conjunction + relative | The separating pronoun huwa | Verb(s) | Time |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 78 | (no wāw) — alladhī | fa-huwa yahdīn | khalaqa (perfect) + yahdī (imperfect) | Past + present |
| 2 | 79 | wa'lladhī | huwa yuṭʿimunī | yuṭʿimu + yasqī (two imperfects) | Present |
| 3 | 80 | (no relative) — wa idhā | fa-huwa yashfīn | mariḍtu (perfect, first person) + yashfī | Condition + result |
| 4 | 81 | wa'lladhī | none | yumītu + yuḥyī | Future |
| 5 | 82 | wa'lladhī | none | aṭmaʿu (first person) + yaghfira | The hereafter |
One — in the first sentence there is no wāw. The sequence begins alladhī khalaqanī; the following four are joined with wa'lladhī. The first sentence is therefore not a member of the sequence but its head. It stands as a direct attribute of rabba'l-ʿālamīn in the seventy-seventh verse.
Two — in the third sentence there is no relative pronoun. The other four are built with alladhī ("the one who"); the third with wa idhā mariḍtu ("when I fall ill"). The mould breaks in the middle of the sequence.
Three — the separating pronoun (huwa) is present in the first three sentences and absent in the last two.
Four — a first-person verb occurs in only two places: mariḍtu (80) and aṭmaʿu (82). The subject of every other verb is God; the subject of these two is Abraham.
| # | Field | Axis of time |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Creation and guidance | The beginning |
| 2 | Eating and drinking | Daily life |
| 3 | Illness and healing | The breakdown of life |
| 4 | Death and resurrection | The end and what follows |
| 5 | Forgiveness | The reckoning |
And the sequence has a widening circle: the first sentence takes existence as its subject, the second the body, the third the body's failing, the fourth the body's ending, the fifth what comes after the body.
I record this as an observation: the sequence is not a list of doctrines; it is a person recounting his own life in order. And this explains why the sentences are so concrete — there is no abstract attribute, all of them are verbs.
And the fāʾ between them must be recorded. Fāʾ al-sababiyya — the fāʾ that announces cause: "He created me, and for that reason He guides me." Guidance, that is, is presented as the continuation of creation: the one who creates does not leave what he created without a way.
The same link is made elsewhere in the Qurʾān: alladhī aʿṭā kulla shayʾin khalqahu thumma hadā (Ṭāhā 20/50) — "who gave everything its creation, then guided". In both verses the order is the same: first creation, then the way.
And at al-Zukhruf 43/26-27 a similar sentence occurs in Abraham's mouth: illā'lladhī faṭaranī fa-innahu sa-yahdīn — "except the one who originated me; He will guide me". The difference between the two verses is one letter:
| Sūra | Expression | Mood |
|---|---|---|
| Al-Zukhruf 43/27 | Fa-innahu sa-yahdīn | Sīn — future |
| Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/78 | Fa-huwa yahdīn | Imperfect — continuance |
This is a difference that can be verified from the text. And as my own reading I record this: in al-Zukhruf the sentence stands inside a declaration of separation from father and people, and with the future it announces a confidence; in al-Shuʿarāʾ the sentence stands at the head of a sequence of description and announces continuance. Two contexts require two moods. This is an explanation; it is not binding.
And the verb yahdīn ties to the sixty-second verse of the sūra: at the seashore Moses had said inna maʿiya rabbī sa-yahdīn. The same verb, the same pattern, two prophets. The difference: Moses with the sīn (the near future), Abraham with fa-huwa (continuance). This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
And the position of the separating pronoun changes. In the first sentence it was fa-huwa (before the verb, with the fāʾ); here it is huwa directly. In Arabic this pronoun (ḍamīr al-faṣl) announces restriction: "the one who feeds is He alone."
The concreteness of the words must be recorded: the verse does not say "He provides" (yarzuqu). It says "He feeds and He gives to drink." Provision is an abstract concept; feeding and giving to drink are two acts of the hand.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the choice of words: the whole sequence is built on this concreteness. Abraham had told his people that the idols do not hear (72); now he describes his own Lord by the most everyday of acts. The comparison is made not through attributes but through verbs.
The middle of the sequence, the sequence's one break, and the real subject of this commentary in this section.
| Difference | The other four sentences | The third sentence |
|---|---|---|
| Construction | (wa)'lladhī — a relative | wa idhā — a conditional particle |
| Subject of the verb | God | I — mariḍtu |
| Time | Continuance or future | Condition and answer |
And the main note is this: at one single place in the sequence the pronoun shifts to the first person, and it does so precisely in the sentence about illness.
- khalaqa-nī — He created me
- yuṭʿimu-nī, yasqī-n — He feeds me, gives me drink
- yumītu-nī, yuḥyī-n — He causes me to die, brings me to life
- yaghfira lī — He forgives me
Throughout the sequence, then, God is the agent and Abraham the object. In one verb alone Abraham becomes the agent — and that verb is illness.
The first ground — that the mould has been broken deliberately. The sequence could have been built as wa'lladhī yumriḍunī fa-huwa yashfīn ("it is He who makes me ill and heals me"); the mould allowed for it, and the sentence about death and life (81) is in exactly this mould: yumītunī thumma yuḥyīn. The sūra, that is, uses the same double-verb mould one verse later. It does not use it in the sentence about illness.
The second ground — that death and illness are handled separately. In the fourth sentence death is attributed directly to God: yumītunī. The text, that is, does not avoid attributing an act that appears negative (causing death). The difference in the sentence about illness cannot therefore be explained by a general rule such as "what is unpleasant is not attributed" — because one verse later death is attributed.
The third ground — the human-facing side of the causes of illness. Illness, unlike death, passes through a person's acts, his negligence, his surroundings and his choices. Death comes to everyone and comes of necessity; illness is a breakdown, and in the chain of causes of a breakdown the person too is present.
On these three grounds my own reading is this, and it is not binding: the sentence leaves illness to the person's own share and healing to God. It is not an attribution of fault but an attribution of cause — the sentence "I fell ill" is not a confession of sin but a note of which side the event came from.
| What the verse does not say | Why it does not say it |
|---|---|
| "Illness comes from a person's sin" | Sin does not occur in the verse; the verb mariḍtu is neutral |
| "God does not give illness" | The verse does not deny the attribution, it merely does not make it |
| "Healing comes only by prayer" | The verse says nothing of secondary causes |
The explanations transmitted for this verse in the classical commentaries look in the same direction, and I give them in a table:
| Explanation | Ground | Its weak side |
|---|---|---|
| What is unpleasant is not attributed to God, out of propriety | There are similar instances in the Qurʾān: the speech of the jinn, wa annā lā nadrī a-sharrun urīda bi-man fi'l-arḍi am arāda bihim rabbuhum rashadā (al-Jinn 72/10 — for the evil no agent is named, for the good one is); this was treated in al-Jinn | One verse later there is the attribution yumītunī (He causes me to die); death too is unpleasant |
| The cause belongs to the person, the outcome to God | Illness comes by causes, healing is beyond the causes | The verse says nothing of causes |
| Because the sentence is in the conditional mould, the verb is necessarily first person | The idhā condition announces a state; there is no other way of saying "when I fall ill" | The mould itself was chosen; alladhī yumriḍunī could also have been said |
The three explanations do not exclude one another. And the third completes the first and the second: the mould was chosen, and the chosen mould changed the attribution.
The root م-ر-ض: the breakdown of soundness, departure from the mean. The lexicographers describe the root as "a defect and weakness occurring in the body or in one's affairs". The Qurʾān uses the same root of the heart as well: fī qulūbihim maraḍun (al-Baqara 2/10). The word, then, does not belong to the body alone.
The root ش-ف-ي: the core the lexicographers give is to come to the edge, the outermost point of a thing (shafā — edge; shafa — lip). Shifāʾ is to come to the edge of an illness, to come out of it. Healing, then, is not the annihilation of the illness but the reaching of its boundary.
And the mould fa-huwa yashfīn must be recorded: it is exactly the same construction as fa-huwa yahdīn in the first sentence. The fāʾ of cause is at work here too: "I fell ill, and therefore He heals."
ثُمَّ — in Arabic it announces sequence with an interval (tarākhī); fāʾ is for succession without interval, thumma for succession with time in between. That there is a distance between death and resurrection is thus in the particle itself.
And the separating pronoun is absent here. The first three sentences had huwa; here and in the fifth it is absent. I record this as an observation about the structure and propose an explanation, which is not binding: the first three sentences are works seen in this world, and there the emphasis "He alone" answers a dispute — because feeding, giving drink and healing can look as though they have other agents. On death and resurrection, however, there is no rival claim to agency to begin with.
And the same pair occurs once more in Abraham's mouth in the Qurʾān: rabbiya'lladhī yuḥyī wa yumīt (al-Baqara 2/258) — and there the answer of the one addressed is anā uḥyī wa umīt. There, that is, a rival claim exists; here it does not. This is a difference that can be verified from the text.
In four sentences the verbs were declarative: He creates, He feeds, He heals, He causes to die. In the fifth there is a verb of hope: aṭmaʿu — "I hope".
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the verb itself: Abraham does not state forgiveness as a right or a certainty. The one uncertain sentence in the sequence is the one concerning his own end.
The root ط-م-ع was analysed in the fifty-first verse and compared there with the sentence of the sorcerers; I do not repeat it. The table there showed this: the two sentences are almost exactly the same, their only difference being singular and plural.
خَطِيٓـَٔة — root خ-ط-ء: to miss the target, to fail to hit. Its opposite is ṣawāb (hitting the mark). In the core of the word there is no intent; for what is intentional ithm or dhanb is used.
And a point of word order: the word is singular — khaṭīʾatī, "my fault". Not the plural (khaṭāyā). The sorcerers had used the plural: khaṭāyānā (51).
The transmitted explanation: the singular announces the class — "whatever fault of mine there may be". I make no firm choice.
يَوْمَ ٱلدِّين — "the day of dīn", that is, the day of reckoning. The root د-ي-ن was analysed in al-Fātiḥa (māliki yawmi'd-dīn) and I do not repeat it. The note there: in the core of the root lie debt, requital and submission; dayn (debt) and dīn (religion) are from the same root.
What the five sentences have in common is that not one of them contains an attribute. Abraham does not describe his Lord as "great", "powerful" or "wise". All five of the five sentences are verbal sentences.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the seventy-second verse: Abraham had asked his people what the idols do — do they hear, do they benefit, do they harm. He had asked about three verbs. Now he recounts his own side with verbs too: He creates, He guides, He feeds, He gives drink, He heals, He causes to die, He brings to life, He forgives. Eight verbs.
The most concrete side of the sequence is the space the sentence about illness leaves open. The verse does not tie illness to a punishment; nor does it place healing outside the order of causes. It stands away from both extremes: neither "what befell you is from your guilt" nor "taking hold of the means is unnecessary".
What the sentence leaves is where responsibility and surrender part: a person takes on his own share, he does not take on the outcome. And this is the same measure as in the third verse of the sūra — the messenger was told "do not grieve", because it was not he who produced the outcome.
رَبِّ هَبْ لِى حُكْمًا وَأَلْحِقْنِى بِٱلصَّٰلِحِينَ · وَٱجْعَل لِّى لِسَانَ صِدْقٍ فِى ٱلْءَاخِرِينَ · وَٱجْعَلْنِى مِن وَرَثَةِ جَنَّةِ ٱلنَّعِيمِ · وَٱغْفِرْ لِأَبِىٓ إِنَّهُۥ كَانَ مِنَ ٱلضَّآلِّينَ · وَلَا تُخْزِنِى يَوْمَ يُبْعَثُونَ · يَوْمَ لَا يَنفَعُ مَالٌ وَلَا بَنُونَ · إِلَّا مَنْ أَتَى ٱللَّهَ بِقَلْبٍ سَلِيمٍ
Rabbi hab lī ḥukman wa alḥiqnī bi'ṣ-ṣāliḥīn · Wa'jʿal lī lisāna ṣidqin fi'l-ākhirīn · Wa'jʿalnī min warathati jannati'n-naʿīm · Wa'ghfir li-abī innahu kāna mina'ḍ-ḍāllīn · Wa lā tukhzinī yawma yubʿathūn · Yawma lā yanfaʿu mālun wa lā banūn · Illā man ata'llāha bi-qalbin salīm
"'My Lord! Bestow judgement upon me and join me to the righteous. · Grant me a tongue of truth among those who come after. · Make me one of the inheritors of the garden of bliss. · And forgive my father; he was one of those who had strayed. · And do not disgrace me on the day when they are raised — · the day when neither wealth nor sons will be of use; · none but he who comes to God with a sound heart.'"
| # | Verse | Petition | Its field |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 83 | Hab lī ḥukman | Knowledge |
| 2 | 83 | Alḥiqnī bi'ṣ-ṣāliḥīn | Company |
| 3 | 84 | Lisāna ṣidqin fi'l-ākhirīn | Those who come after |
| 4 | 85 | Min warathati jannati'n-naʿīm | The hereafter |
| 5 | 86 | Wa'ghfir li-abī | His father |
| 6 | 87 | Lā tukhzinī yawma yubʿathūn | The day of reckoning |
Five petitions for himself, one for another. And that one is the person standing on the other side of the dispute: his father.
I record this as an observation: in the seventy-seventh verse it was said "they are an enemy to me"; in the eighty-sixth forgiveness is asked for one person from within that same people.
| Verse | Who | Expression | Mood |
|---|---|---|---|
| 21 | Moses | Fa-wahaba lī rabbī ḥukman | Perfect — given |
| 83 | Abraham | Rabbi hab lī ḥukman | Imperative — asked for |
The same verb (و-ه-ب), the same object (ḥukm), two different moods. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
The root analysis of the word was given in the section on 26/20-22 (ح-ك-م — to make firm, to put on the bit); I do not repeat it.
لِسَان — the tongue (the organ) and speech, the language spoken. In the construction the second sense is at work: to be well spoken of in the mouths of those who come after, to be remembered with truth.
صِدْق — root ص-د-ق: the correspondence of speech with reality, soundness. The lexicographers record that in the concrete core of the root lie hardness and durability (rumḥun ṣadq — a stout spear). True speech, then, is durable speech.
The petition, then, is this: "let a true word remain behind me." Not to be famous, but to be remembered with truth.
And a link can be made with the mould recorded in al-Ṣāffāt: there the seal of the sequence of prophets was wa taraknā ʿalayhi fi'l-ākhirīn ("and We left upon him [a remembrance] among those who came after"), and Abraham had received that seal (al-Ṣāffāt 37/108).
| Sūra | Expression | Who says it |
|---|---|---|
| Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/84 | Wa'jʿal lī lisāna ṣidqin fi'l-ākhirīn | Abraham — a petition |
| Al-Ṣāffāt 37/108 | Wa taraknā ʿalayhi fi'l-ākhirīn | God — granted |
The same adverbial phrase (fi'l-ākhirīn), in two sūras, one a request and one a response. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text. And as my own reading I record this: when the two sūras are read together the petition and its answer come to stand side by side. That this link is made is not stated in the text.
Al-Tawba 9/114 touches directly on this event: wa mā kāna'stighfāru Ibrāhīma li-abīhi illā ʿan mawʿidatin waʿadahā iyyāhu fa-lammā tabayyana lahu annahu ʿaduwwun li'llāhi tabarraʾa minh — "Abraham's asking forgiveness for his father was only because of a promise he had made to him; when it became clear to him that he was an enemy to God, he dissociated himself from him."
The Qurʾān, that is, both transmits this petition and draws its limit. This is a datum that can be verified from the text and requires no explanation — the Qurʾān gives the explanation itself.
And at al-Mumtaḥina 60/4 the same event is named as an exception (illā qawla Ibrāhīma li-abīhi la-astaghfiranna lak) and was treated in al-Mumtaḥana. I rely on the note there.
I do not enter into details about Abraham's father that the Qurʾān does not give; the reports about his name, his trade and his end are not in the Qurʾān.
And a point of word order must be recorded: the ground given is innahu kāna mina'ḍ-ḍāllīn — "he was one of those who had strayed".
The root ض-ل-ل was analysed in the twentieth verse, and it was recorded there that Moses used it of himself (wa anā mina'ḍ-ḍāllīn). The same word thus occurs twice in the sūra: once by Moses of himself, once by Abraham of his father. This is a repetition that can be verified from the text.
And the choice of the word is worth recording: Abraham does not call his father kāfir or ẓālim. He uses the mildest word: one who has lost the way.
The root خ-ز-ي: to be brought to shame, to be humiliated, to have one's face fall. Khizy — disgrace.
A point of word order: Abraham does not say "protect me from the punishment" or "admit me to the garden" — he had already asked for the garden in the eighty-fifth verse. What he asks for here is not escape from punishment but not to be shamed.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the choice of the verb: khizy is not a pain but the loss of a standing — to be made small before others. The petition, then, looks to the social side of the reckoning.
In Arabic an indefinite noun after a negative particle negates the whole class: "no wealth whatever, no sons whatever".
And the two things chosen must be recorded: māl (wealth) and banūn (sons). The Qurʾān names the two together in many places — al-mālu wa'l-banūna zīnatu'l-ḥayāti'd-dunyā (al-Kahf 18/46), innamā amwālukum wa awlādukum fitna (al-Taghābun 64/15 — treated in al-Taghābun).
I record this as an observation: both are things that provide power and continuance in a society. Wealth represents present power, sons future continuation. The verse voids them both in the same sentence.
And a link can be made with the section on Hūd in the sūra: amaddakum bi-anʿāmin wa banīn (133) — sons are counted among the favours given to the people of Hūd. The sūra thus names the same thing in one place as a favour and in another as something that brings no benefit. Not a contradiction; two different days are being spoken of.
| Reading | What the exception attaches to | Its meaning |
|---|---|---|
| Disjunctive | Lā yanfaʿu mālun wa lā banūn | "Wealth and sons are of no use; but he who comes with a sound heart is benefited" |
| Conjunctive | Those who will benefit | "Only for him who comes with a sound heart do [his wealth and his sons] benefit" |
The first reading is the widespread one and fits the flow of the sentence better; the second is also transmitted. I do not impose a preference.
أَتَى ٱللَّهَ بِـ — the pattern must be recorded. Atā … bi- in Arabic means "to bring"; not "to come". So it is not "he who comes to God" but "he who brings to God".
And at al-Ṣāffāt 37/84 the same construction occurs of the same person: idh jāʾa rabbahu bi-qalbin salīm. It was treated there, and the note there holds here too:
| Sūra | Verb | Of whom | Who says it |
|---|---|---|---|
| Al-Ṣāffāt 37/84 | Jāʾa … bi- | Abraham | The narrator |
| Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/89 | Atā … bi- | General — "whoever" | Abraham himself |
The same construction, the same structure, two different verbs (jāʾa and atā) and opposite directions: in al-Ṣāffāt Abraham himself is described, in al-Shuʿarāʾ Abraham sets a measure. This overlap was already recorded in al-Ṣāffāt and I rely on that treatment.
سَلِيم — root س-ل-م: to be sound, to be without defect, to be in safety. The root was analysed in Qāf, in al-Jinn and in al-Baqara. From the same root: salām (peace), silm (peace-making), islām (to submit).
The faʿīl pattern in Arabic can carry both an active and a passive sense, and in al-Ṣāffāt the senses transmitted for this word were given in a table. I do not repeat it; its summary is this: without defect, without illness, sound (the primary sense) or submitted (the second sense).
What is to be added here is an observation about the context, and I record it as my own reading: the primary sense of the word salīm is freedom from illness. And nine verses earlier illness had occurred: wa idhā mariḍtu fa-huwa yashfīn (80). After recounting the illness of the body and its healing, the sūra sets the soundness of the heart as its measure. That this link is intended is not stated in the text; that the two words come from the same semantic field and stand nine verses apart is a datum of the text.
What the heart is to be sound from is not said in the verse. The transmitted explanations: from associating partners, from hypocrisy, from rancour, from love of the world. There is no limit in the verse; for that reason I do not impose a preference. What is to be recorded is this: the measure is not a deed but a state — and that state is something "brought".
وَأُزْلِفَتِ ٱلْجَنَّةُ لِلْمُتَّقِينَ · وَبُرِّزَتِ ٱلْجَحِيمُ لِلْغَاوِينَ · وَقِيلَ لَهُمْ أَيْنَ مَا كُنتُمْ تَعْبُدُونَ · مِن دُونِ ٱللَّهِ هَلْ يَنصُرُونَكُمْ أَوْ يَنتَصِرُونَ · فَكُبْكِبُوا۟ فِيهَا هُمْ وَٱلْغَاوُۥنَ · وَجُنُودُ إِبْلِيسَ أَجْمَعُونَ
Wa uzlifati'l-jannatu li'l-muttaqīn · Wa burrizati'l-jaḥīmu li'l-ghāwīn · Wa qīla lahum ayna mā kuntum taʿbudūn · Min dūni'llāh; hal yanṣurūnakum aw yantaṣirūn · Fa-kubkibū fīhā hum wa'l-ghāwūn · Wa junūdu Iblīsa ajmaʿūn
"And the garden was brought near to those who guard themselves; · and the blaze was made plain to sight for those gone astray. · And it was said to them: 'Where are those you used to serve — · apart from God? Do they help you, or help themselves?' · Thereupon they were flung headlong into it: they, and those gone astray, · and the hosts of Iblīs, all together."
| Verse | Verb | Form | Sense | For whom |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 90 | uzlifat | Form IV, passive | Was brought near | al-muttaqīn |
| 91 | burrizat | Form II, passive | Was made plain to sight | al-ghāwīn |
The verbs do not do opposite work; they do two different kinds of work. The garden is brought near (the distance closes); the blaze is brought out into view (visibility increases). One approaches, the other becomes visible.
The root ز-ل-ف was analysed in the sixty-fourth verse (wa azlafnā thamma'l-ākharīn), and the link between these two verses was set out in a table there; I do not repeat it.
The root ب-ر-ز: the coming out of what was hidden, appearing in the open. Bāriza — what is out in the open; burūz — appearing. Form II (barraza) is transitive and intensive: "it was brought out plainly into view."
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the difference of the two verbs: the verses recount what each side meets in the language of perception. For the one who guards himself what changes is distance; for the one gone astray what changes is sight.
The root was analysed in al-Najm and I do not repeat it. The description there: غ-و-ي — to lose the right direction, to transgress; ghayy — waywardness. And something was recorded there: the plural of the word, ghāwūn, is used in the Qurʾān for those who follow the poets (al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/224).
| Verse | Expression | Who |
|---|---|---|
| 91 | Wa burrizati'l-jaḥīmu li'l-ghāwīn | The side to whom the blaze is shown |
| 94 | Fa-kubkibū fīhā hum wa'l-ghāwūn | Those who are with those flung in |
| 224 | Wa'sh-shuʿarāʾu yattabiʿuhumu'l-ghāwūn | Those who follow the poets |
This is a repetition that can be verified from the text, and it binds the two ends of the sūra. The word from the scene of the gathering in the account of Abraham returns in the final paragraph of the sūra. What the link means is interpretation and will be treated in the section on verse 224.
And a comparison recorded in al-Najm attaches here: in that same sūra it is said mā ḍalla ṣāḥibukum wa mā ghawā (53/2) — "your companion has neither strayed nor gone astray". Al-Najm, that is, clears the messenger of ghayy, while al-Shuʿarāʾ describes the ghāwūn. The two sūras stand on the two banks of the same root.
| Verse | Question | Who asks | When |
|---|---|---|---|
| 70 | Mā taʿbudūn — "what do you serve?" | Abraham | In this world |
| 92 | Ayna mā kuntum taʿbudūn — "where are those you served?" | (unnamed) — "it was said" | At the gathering |
The same verb (taʿbudūn), two different interrogative particles: mā and ayna. One asks after the kind, the other after the place.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the sameness of the verb in the two verses: the question in this world had gone unanswered — the people had said bal and changed the subject (74). The question at the gathering goes unanswered too: in the ninety-third verse the questioning continues, and in the ninety-fourth what comes is not an answer but a result.
| Word | Form | Sense |
|---|---|---|
| Yanṣurūna-kum | Form I, transitive | Do they help you |
| Yantaṣirūn | Form VIII (iftiʿāl) | Can they defend themselves |
In Arabic Form VIII adds reflexivity: a person's doing something for himself. Intiṣār — to help oneself, to defend, to avenge.
The question therefore has two stages, and the second is the heavier: "if they cannot help you, can they save themselves?"
The same two-stage structure was present at Fāṭir 35/14 as well (lā yasmaʿū … wa law samiʿū ma'stajābū) and was treated there. In both verses the proof is completed at the second stage.
And the verb intaṣara will return in the last verse of the sūra: wa'ntaṣarū min baʿdi mā ẓulimū (227). The same form, the same root — but there in the positive: "and they defended themselves after being wronged." This is an overlap that can be verified from the text and will be treated in the section on verse 227.
ك-ب-ك-ب — a four-letter (quadriliteral) root; the reduplicated form of the root ك-ب-ب. ك-ب-ب: to overturn face down, to fling headlong.
The reduplicated pattern (kabkaba) must be recorded: in Arabic the repetition of a letter announces the repetition of the act. The lexicographers explain this verb as "to be thrown down again and again, rolling over" — not to fall once and stop, but to tumble over and over.
And the verb is passive: kubkibū — "they were flung". Who flung them is not said. The verbs in the ninetieth and ninety-first verses were passive too (uzlifat, burrizat), as was the one in the ninety-second (qīla). All four verbs of the scene of the gathering, that is, are given without naming an agent.
I record this as an observation about the structure: the scene is recounted not as the works of an agent but as things that come to pass.
| Order | Who | Identity |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Hum | Those served — the "those you used to serve" of the ninety-second verse |
| 2 | Al-ghāwūn | Those who served |
| 3 | Junūdu Iblīsa ajmaʿūn | The hosts of Iblīs |
The one served and the one who served go to the same place. And this is the counterpart of the sentence "they are an enemy to me" in the seventy-seventh verse: what is served does not save the one who serves.
إِبْلِيس — the origin of the word is disputed; it is widely said to derive from the root ب-ل-س (to lose hope, to be struck dumb), and it is also transmitted that it is the arabised form of a foreign word. I make no firm choice.
And who his hosts are is not said in the verse. I do not enter into a detail the Qurʾān does not give.
قَالُوا۟ وَهُمْ فِيهَا يَخْتَصِمُونَ · تَٱللَّهِ إِن كُنَّا لَفِى ضَلَٰلٍ مُّبِينٍ · إِذْ نُسَوِّيكُم بِرَبِّ ٱلْعَٰلَمِينَ · وَمَآ أَضَلَّنَآ إِلَّا ٱلْمُجْرِمُونَ · فَمَا لَنَا مِن شَٰفِعِينَ · وَلَا صَدِيقٍ حَمِيمٍ · فَلَوْ أَنَّ لَنَا كَرَّةً فَنَكُونَ مِنَ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ · إِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ لَءَايَةً ۖ وَمَا كَانَ أَكْثَرُهُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ · وَإِنَّ رَبَّكَ لَهُوَ ٱلْعَزِيزُ ٱلرَّحِيمُ
Qālū wa hum fīhā yakhtaṣimūn · Ta'llāhi in kunnā la-fī ḍalālin mubīn · Idh nusawwīkum bi-rabbi'l-ʿālamīn · Wa mā aḍallanā illa'l-mujrimūn · Fa-mā lanā min shāfiʿīn · Wa lā ṣadīqin ḥamīm · Fa-law anna lanā karratan fa-nakūna mina'l-muʾminīn · Inna fī dhālika la-āyatan wa mā kāna aktharuhum muʾminīn · Wa inna rabbaka la-huwa'l-ʿazīzu'r-raḥīm
"There, quarrelling with one another, they say: · 'By God, we were in plain error — · when we made you equal to the Lord of all the worlds! · It was only the guilty who led us astray. · Now we have no intercessor, · and not one devoted friend. · If only we had another turn, that we might be among the believers!' · In this there is surely a sign; but most of them were not believers. · And your Lord — He indeed — is the Mighty, the Merciful."
The root خ-ص-م: to quarrel, to litigate. Form VIII (ikhtiṣām) announces reciprocity: to quarrel with one another.
And at al-Ṣāffāt 37/27 the same scene was recorded: fa-aqbala baʿḍuhum ʿalā baʿḍin yatasāʾalūn — "they turn to one another, questioning". It was treated there, and what was recorded there was this: the same sentence occurs in two different forms, in the fire and in the garden.
Al-Shuʿarāʾ's difference: the verb is not tasāʾul (questioning) but ikhtiṣām (quarrelling). This is a difference that can be verified from the text.
In Arabic an oath is made with three letters: wāw, bāʾ, tāʾ. تَ is the least used, and it comes only with the name of God.
The lexicographers record that the tāʾ oath announces taʿajjub (astonishment). Not "by God", then, but "by God — it is hardly to be believed!"
And the word occurs in several places in the Qurʾān; in each there is a context of astonishment (Yūsuf 12/73, 12/85, 12/91; al-Naḥl 16/56; al-Anbiyāʾ 21/57).
I record this as an observation: the oath sworn in the fire is not to prove a claim — it announces their astonishment at their own past.
A grammatical note: the in here is not the negative particle but the lightened form of in (in al-mukhaffafa; its original is inna). Its mark is the lām at the head of the predicate (la-fī). The sense, then, is not "we were not" but "we were".
This is a construction easily confused in Arabic, and a similar case was recorded in al-Takāthur.
The root س-و-ي: to be equal, to make equal, to set straight. Form II (sawwā) is transitive: to hold equal.
And a point of word order must be recorded: the confession is not "we served you" but "we made you equal".
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the choice of the verb: the definition of associating partners is made here not through worship but through equating. The matter, that is, is not whether something was worshipped; it is whether something was set in the same pan of the scales as God.
And this accords with Abraham's question in the seventy-second verse: he too had asked not after the content of worship but after the comparison (does it hear, does it benefit, does it harm).
| Verse | Sentence | What it does |
|---|---|---|
| 97-98 | In kunnā la-fī ḍalālin mubīn … idh nusawwīkum | Confession — "we did it" |
| 99 | Wa mā aḍallanā illa'l-mujrimūn | Transfer — "they led us astray" |
I record this as an observation: the same mouth says two different things in two sentences. And the Qurʾān records this scene in other sūras as well — Sabaʾ 34/31-33, al-Ṣāffāt 37/27-33 (treated in al-Ṣāffāt), al-Aḥzāb 33/67. What all of them have in common is the passing of the guilt to the other side.
ٱلْمُجْرِمُون — root ج-ر-م: the concrete sense the lexicographers give is to pluck fruit from the branch (jaramu'n-nakhl — to harvest dates). From there it passes to "to earn" and "to earn something evil, to commit a crime". Mujrim — one who earns guilt.
And that the word is left indefinite must be recorded: who is spoken of is not said. The forefathers? The leaders? The satans? The text does not say.
| Word | Root | What |
|---|---|---|
| Shāfiʿīn — plural | ش-ف-ع | Intercessors — mediators |
| Ṣadīqin ḥamīm — singular | ص-د-ق / ح-م-م | A devoted friend |
The difference of number must be recorded: the intercessor is plural, the friend singular. The transmitted explanation: intercessors may be many, but a true friend is one; both are said to be absent — "neither a crowd of mediators nor a single friend."
The root ش-ف-ع: to make a pair, to double what is single. Shafʿ — even (the al-shafʿi wa'l-watr of al-Fajr 89/3 — treated in al-Fajr). Intercession is not leaving a person alone but another's joining himself to his side. The word, that is, means before "mediation" "not being alone".
And the work of the sentence is understood from this: fa-mā lanā min shāfiʿīn — "there is no one who joins himself to us." The loneliness is in the root of the word.
حَمِيم — root ح-م-م: hot, very hot. From the same root: ḥamīm (boiling water — it does not occur in the sūra apart from 26/101, but it is frequent in the Qurʾān) and ḥamīm (an intimate friend).
Two senses in the same word, and the link the lexicographers make is this: friendship too is a kind of "heat" — the warmth of concern and closeness. The word was treated in al-Ḥāqqa and at al-Maʿārij 70/10 (wa lā yasʾalu ḥamīmun ḥamīmā).
And this verse was already cited in al-Nabaʾ; I rely on the note there.
I record a point about the word: the same word is used in the Qurʾān both for the boiling water of the fire and for a devoted friend. The verse makes those who look for the second speak from inside the first. I leave this as an observation; I do not claim that the verse intends it.
The root ك-ر-ر: to turn, to repeat, to wheel round in an attack and charge again. Karra — a turn, a repetition.
لَوْ here announces a wish (tamannī) whose fulfilment is impossible. The apodosis of the sentence is not stated — in Arabic this is called the elision of the jawāb law, and it announces that the wish goes unanswered.
And the same wish is repeated in many places in the Qurʾān: wa law tarā idh wuqifū ʿala'n-nāri fa-qālū yā laytanā nuraddu (al-Anʿām 6/27), rabbanā akhrijnā naʿmal ṣāliḥan ghayra'lladhī kunnā naʿmal (Fāṭir 35/37 — treated in Fāṭir). What all of them have in common is that the wish goes unanswered.
And a point of word order: the wish is not "let us enter the garden" but "let us be among the believers". Fa-nakūna mina'l-muʾminīn. What is asked for, that is, is not an outcome but a standing.
And this is the same word as in the seal of the sūra: wa mā kāna aktharuhum muʾminīn. The scene of the gathering, which runs from the ninety-second verse to the hundred and second, ends by arriving at the word of the seal. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text, and it shows why the seal is set exactly here.
The third seal of the sūra. The mould was treated at 26/8-9; I do not repeat it.
An observation about position: the account of Abraham ends without recounting the worldly fate of his people. The seal is set not after a destruction but after a scene of the gathering. Among the seven accounts this is so only here.
From the hundred and fifth verse to the hundred and ninety-first there are five accounts, and all five sit in the same mould. The whole of the mould was given in five tables in the section "The backbone of the sūra". I do not repeat it here; in the verse headings below only the parts peculiar to each account will be treated.
The word analyses of the shared mould are made once here and will not be repeated in the four accounts that follow.
All five of the five accounts open with this sentence, and in all five the object is plural: al-mursalīn — "those sent".
But to each people one messenger came. The people of Noah denied Noah, ʿĀd denied Hūd, Thamūd denied Ṣāliḥ. The text, however, says "they denied the messengers".
| Explanation | Ground |
|---|---|
| To deny one messenger is to deny them all | The essential message the messengers bring is one |
| They had denied the messengers before them too | Each people had received news of the one before |
| The class is meant | Al-mursalīn is a definite plural; it announces the institution of messengership |
All three are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. What is to be recorded is this: the sentence ties a single event to a whole attitude. And the entire structure of the sūra is built on this — the same mould is repeated seven times, because what is recounted is not seven separate events but one attitude.
The root أ-م-ن: to be safe, to be at ease in heart. From the same root: īmān (to trust, to believe), amāna, amn, amīn.
And a point of word order must be recorded: lakum has been brought forward. The ordinary order would have been innī rasūlun amīnun lakum. In Arabic bringing forward (taqdīm) announces specification and concern: "for you", "belonging to you".
The messenger, that is, introduces himself in relation to those he addresses: "I am a trustworthy messenger sent to you."
And the attribute amīn must be recorded: the messenger does not introduce himself as "learned", "superior" or "chosen". He introduces himself as trustworthy — that is, with an attribute those he addresses can test by their own experience.
And the same attribute will be used of the one who brings the revelation in verse 193 of the sūra: nazala bihi'r-rūḥu'l-amīn. In the sūra amīn thus occurs in two places: of the five messengers and of the one who brings down the revelation. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text and will be treated in the section on 192-199.
The root ت-ق-ي (the original root و-ق-ي): to guard, to take shelter. Taqwā is not "to fear" but "to put oneself under protection". The root was analysed in al-Baqara, in al-Ḥujurāt and in al-Layl.
The root ط-و-ع: to obey willingly. Ṭawʿ — willingness; its opposite is karh (compulsion). The root was treated at Fuṣṣilat 41/11 (ataynā ṭāʾiʿīn).
And the order of the two commands must be recorded: first guarding oneself against God, then obeying the messenger. The messenger asks to be obeyed on a ground that first attaches to God.
And the elision in aṭīʿūn: its original is aṭīʿūnī; the final yāʾ has dropped for the sake of the verse-ending. This is a kind of elision frequently repeated in the sūra — yukadhdhibūn(i), yaqtulūn(i), yahdīn(i), yasqīn(i), yashfīn(i), yuḥyīn(i). The verse-ending scheme of the sūra, that is, drops the pronouns at the ends of verbs. This is a fact that can be verified from the text and bears directly on the sūra's single-voiced structure.
The five occurrences of the sentence and its function within the sūra were tabulated in the section "The backbone of the sūra"; I do not repeat it.
One — min ajrin. The min that comes after a negative particle announces comprehensiveness (istighrāq) in Arabic: "no wage whatever". Not "I ask for little", then, but "I ask for none".
Two — in ajriya illā ʿalā rabbi'l-ʿālamīn. The in here is a negative particle (in the sense of mā), and together with illā it sets up restriction (qaṣr): "my wage falls only upon the Lord of all the worlds."
And the preposition ʿalā must be recorded: in Arabic ʿalā announces debt and obligation (ʿalayhi daynun — he has a debt upon him). The wage, that is, is recounted not as a favour but as an undertaking.
كَذَّبَتْ قَوْمُ نُوحٍ ٱلْمُرْسَلِينَ · إِذْ قَالَ لَهُمْ أَخُوهُمْ نُوحٌ أَلَا تَتَّقُونَ · إِنِّى لَكُمْ رَسُولٌ أَمِينٌ · فَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَأَطِيعُونِ · وَمَآ أَسْـَٔلُكُمْ عَلَيْهِ مِنْ أَجْرٍ ۖ إِنْ أَجْرِىَ إِلَّا عَلَىٰ رَبِّ ٱلْعَٰلَمِينَ · فَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَأَطِيعُونِ
Kadhdhabat qawmu Nūḥin'il-mursalīn · Idh qāla lahum akhūhum Nūḥun alā tattaqūn · Innī lakum rasūlun amīn · Fa'ttaqū'llāha wa aṭīʿūn · Wa mā asʾalukum ʿalayhi min ajrin; in ajriya illā ʿalā rabbi'l-ʿālamīn · Fa'ttaqū'llāha wa aṭīʿūn
"The people of Noah too denied the messengers. · When their brother Noah said to them: 'Will you not guard yourselves? · I am a trustworthy messenger sent to you. · So guard yourselves against God and obey me. · I ask you no wage for it; my wage falls only upon the Lord of all the worlds. · So guard yourselves against God and obey me.'"
Five of these six verses are the shared mould of the sūra and were treated in the section above. I do not repeat it.
The only thing peculiar to the account of Noah is that the mould is set up here for the first time — the four accounts that follow are its repetition.
And the second occurrence of the sentence fa'ttaqū'llāha wa aṭīʿūn (110) comes here with only one verse between. What this means was treated in Table 4 of the section "The backbone of the sūra".
The word occurs in four of the five accounts (106, 124, 142, 161) and drops with Shuʿayb (177). The reason was treated in the section on the backbone; I do not repeat it.
What is to be added here is a note on sense: akh here announces not brotherhood of lineage but fellowship of people. In Arabic one of a community is called "their brother" in relation to that community.
And this is a recurring note in the Qurʾān's understanding of messengership: the messenger is from within the community he is sent to. There are two exceptions within the sūra itself: Moses (who goes to the people of Pharaoh from outside) and Shuʿayb (whose addressees are named by a place).
The account of Noah occurs in many sūras of the Qurʾān, and in this commentary the section Nūḥ was given over to it entirely. I do not repeat the findings there.
The part that falls to al-Shuʿarāʾ must be recorded: the sūra does not recount Noah's method of calling (in secret and openly, by night and by day — Nūḥ 71/5-9); it does not recount the ark, the flood, his son, or the length of time either.
| Sūra | What it brings to the front | Where it was treated |
|---|---|---|
| Nūḥ 71 | The method of calling, the length of time, the prayer | Nūḥ |
| Hūd 11/25-49 | The ark, his son, the flood | — |
| Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/105-122 | The objection "the lowest have followed you" | here |
| Al-Ṣāffāt 37/75-82 | The deliverance and his progeny | al-Ṣāffāt |
| Al-Qamar 54/9-16 | The flood itself | al-Qamar |
Al-Shuʿarāʾ, that is, takes from the account of Noah only one dispute: the question of who has believed. This suits the sūra as a whole — the sūra recounts not events but speeches.
قَالُوٓا۟ أَنُؤْمِنُ لَكَ وَٱتَّبَعَكَ ٱلْأَرْذَلُونَ · قَالَ وَمَا عِلْمِى بِمَا كَانُوا۟ يَعْمَلُونَ · إِنْ حِسَابُهُمْ إِلَّا عَلَىٰ رَبِّى ۖ لَوْ تَشْعُرُونَ · وَمَآ أَنَا۠ بِطَارِدِ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ · إِنْ أَنَا۠ إِلَّا نَذِيرٌ مُّبِينٌ
Qālū a-nuʾminu laka wa'ttabaʿaka'l-ardhalūn · Qāla wa mā ʿilmī bimā kānū yaʿmalūn · In ḥisābuhum illā ʿalā rabbī law tashʿurūn · Wa mā anā bi-ṭāridi'l-muʾminīn · In anā illā nadhīrun mubīn
"They said: 'Shall we believe you when the lowest of the people have followed you?' · He said: 'I have no knowledge of what they have been doing. · Their reckoning falls only upon my Lord — if only you understood! · I am not one to drive away the believers. · I am nothing but a clear warner.'"
The people do not discuss what Noah has said. They do not speak of God's oneness, of the hereafter, of messengership. Their objection concerns who has believed.
I record this as an observation: the five answers the other side gives in the sūra differ from one another, and in none of them is there a counter-proof. This is the first answer, and its subject is not the content but the composition of the parties.
The root ر-ذ-ل: the worthless, the low, the useless part of a thing. Ardhal — an elative: the lowest, the most worthless. The Qurʾān uses the same word of the feeblest stage of life as well: ardhali'l-ʿumur (al-Naḥl 16/70; al-Ḥajj 22/5).
And that the word has a social sense is clear from the telling of the same event at Hūd 11/27: wa mā narāka'ttabaʿaka illa'lladhīna hum arādhilunā bādiya'r-raʾy — "we see none following you but our lowest, at first glance". The objection, that is, looks to economic and social standing.
I record this as an observation, and it belongs to the same family as the objection recorded at al-Zukhruf 43/31: law lā nuzzila hādha'l-qurʾānu ʿalā rajulin mina'l-qaryatayni ʿaẓīm — "if only this Qurʾān had been sent down upon a great man of the two towns". Both objections make the standing of those who carry or receive the message the measure.
In both places āmana li- is used: "to trust you, to hold you true". This is an overlap that can be verified from the text. And in both the subject is not what is to be believed but the person to be believed.
Noah does not defend those who have believed. He does not say "they are good people". He says "I do not know what they have been doing".
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the sentence itself: the answer rejects the ground the objection rests on. The objection made the quality of the believers the measure; the answer says that measure does not belong to the messenger.
And the next verse closes this plainly: in ḥisābuhum illā ʿalā rabbī — "their reckoning falls only upon my Lord".
And the preposition ʿalā must be recorded: the same preposition was in the sentence about the wage (ʿalā rabbi'l-ʿālamīn). In both sentences ʿalā ties the obligation to God: the wage and the reckoning both belong to Him. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
لَوْ تَشْعُرُونَ — "if only you understood". The root ش-ع-ر: to perceive what is fine and hidden. From the same root come shiʿr (poetry) and shāʿir (poet) — the word will return in the final section of the sūra (224). This is a repetition that can be verified from the text, and the analysis of the root will be made there.
And the word order of the sentence must be recorded: the mā … bi- mould. In Arabic the bāʾ that comes on the predicate of the negative mā reinforces the negation: "I will never drive them away."
And the object must be recorded: al-muʾminīn — "the believers". The people had called them al-ardhalūn ("the lowest"); Noah names those same persons al-muʾminīn.
And the Qurʾān takes up this matter elsewhere too: wa lā taṭrudi'lladhīna yadʿūna rabbahum bi'l-ghadāti wa'l-ʿashiyy (al-Anʿām 6/52) — the same root (taṭrud), the same prohibition. And Sūrat ʿAbasa treats another face of this matter; it was treated in ʿAbasa.
And it ties to the third verse of the sūra. I record it as my own reading: at 26/3 the messenger was told "you are almost destroying yourself" — that is, he was informed that he is not responsible for the outcome. In the hundred and fifteenth verse another messenger states the same limit with his own mouth: "I am only a warner."
And the list of limits tabulated at al-Qaṣaṣ 28/56 is a relative of this verse as well. I rely on the note there.
مُّبِين — a word occurring five times in the sūra; its analysis was made and tabulated at 26/1-2. That it qualifies nadhīr here must be recorded: the warning is not hidden or veiled — it is a warning that makes clear.
قَالُوا۟ لَئِن لَّمْ تَنتَهِ يَٰنُوحُ لَتَكُونَنَّ مِنَ ٱلْمَرْجُومِينَ · قَالَ رَبِّ إِنَّ قَوْمِى كَذَّبُونِ · فَٱفْتَحْ بَيْنِى وَبَيْنَهُمْ فَتْحًا وَنَجِّنِى وَمَن مَّعِىَ مِنَ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ · فَأَنجَيْنَٰهُ وَمَن مَّعَهُۥ فِى ٱلْفُلْكِ ٱلْمَشْحُونِ · ثُمَّ أَغْرَقْنَا بَعْدُ ٱلْبَاقِينَ · إِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ لَءَايَةً ۖ وَمَا كَانَ أَكْثَرُهُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ · وَإِنَّ رَبَّكَ لَهُوَ ٱلْعَزِيزُ ٱلرَّحِيمُ
Qālū la-in lam tantahi yā Nūḥu la-takūnanna mina'l-marjūmīn · Qāla rabbi inna qawmī kadhdhabūn · Fa'ftaḥ baynī wa baynahum fatḥan wa najjinī wa man maʿiya mina'l-muʾminīn · Fa-anjaynāhu wa man maʿahu fi'l-fulki'l-mashḥūn · Thumma aghraqnā baʿdu'l-bāqīn · Inna fī dhālika la-āyatan wa mā kāna aktharuhum muʾminīn · Wa inna rabbaka la-huwa'l-ʿazīzu'r-raḥīm
"They said: 'Noah! If you do not stop, you will be among those stoned!' · He said: 'My Lord! My people have denied me. · Open a clear opening between me and them; and save me and the believers who are with me.' · So We saved him and those with him in the laden ark; · then We drowned the rest who remained. · In this there is surely a sign; but most of them were not believers. · And your Lord — He indeed — is the Mighty, the Merciful."
| Verse | Who | Expression | The threat |
|---|---|---|---|
| 116 | The people of Noah | La-in lam tantahi yā Nūḥu la-takūnanna mina'l-marjūmīn | To be stoned |
| 167 | The people of Lot | La-in lam tantahi yā Lūṭu la-takūnanna mina'l-mukhrajīn | To be driven out |
The two sentences are the same but for one word. This is a datum that can be verified from the text and another instance of the sūra's technique of repetition.
The root ن-ه-ي: an end, an extremity, the place where a thing finishes (muntahā — the final point reached). Intahā — to desist, to make an end. Not "be silent", then, but "finish with it".
The root ر-ج-م: to stone, to throw stones. The word is used in the Qurʾān both for stoning in deed and for stoning with words (cursing, driving off). Another use of the root (the stoning of the satans) was treated at al-Mulk 67/5 and in al-Takwīr.
The root ف-ت-ح: to open. And the lexicographers record a second semantic field of the root: to give judgement, to settle a case. From the same root: fattāḥ (the one who judges — the al-Fattāḥu'l-ʿAlīm of Sabaʾ 34/26).
The link the lexicographers make is this: a judgement opens a matter that was closed. The case, that is, stands "closed", and the judge "opens" it.
The root was analysed in al-Fatḥ and I do not repeat it.
And the cognate accusative must be recorded: fa'ftaḥ … fatḥan. The verb is reinforced with a verbal noun from its own root. In Arabic this construction strengthens the verb: "open a decisive opening", that is, "give a decisive judgement."
And the word order of the request must be recorded: Noah does not ask for destruction. He says "open between us" — he asks, that is, for separation and judgement. And immediately after he asks for deliverance: wa najjinī wa man maʿiya mina'l-muʾminīn.
In Nūḥ a prayer of Noah's different from the one in this sūra was treated (rabbi lā tadhar ʿala'l-arḍi mina'l-kāfirīna dayyārā — Nūḥ 71/26). The difference between the two prayers is worth recording:
| Sūra | Prayer | Its content |
|---|---|---|
| Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/118 | Fa'ftaḥ baynī wa baynahum fatḥan | Judgement and deliverance |
| Nūḥ 71/26 | Lā tadhar ʿala'l-arḍi mina'l-kāfirīna dayyārā | Destruction |
This is a difference that can be verified from the text. In what order the two prayers were made is not said in the Qurʾān; I set up no ordering.
And a point of word order must be recorded: the building of the ark is not recounted. The sūra names the ark for the first and only time already laden. The sūra, that is, gives not the process but the result.
And the same attribute occurs once more in the Qurʾān: wa āyatun lahum annā ḥamalnā dhurriyyatahum fi'l-fulki'l-mashḥūn (Yā Sīn 36/41 — treated in Yāsīn). The same construction, in two sūras.
And the arrangement is the same as in the account of Moses: first the saving (119), then the drowning (120).
| Account | Saving | Destruction |
|---|---|---|
| Moses | 65 — wa anjaynā Mūsā wa man maʿahu | 66 — thumma aghraqna'l-ākharīn |
| Noah | 119 — fa-anjaynāhu wa man maʿahu | 120 — thumma aghraqnā baʿdu'l-bāqīn |
In both accounts the same verb (anjā), the same conjunction (thumma), the same verb (aghraqa). This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
The difference is in one word: in the account of Moses the drowned are al-ākharīn ("the others"), in the account of Noah al-bāqīn ("those who remained"). The second word announces that no one was left apart from those saved.
بَعْدُ — "afterwards, thereafter". It comes as an adverb with the following genitive elided (baʿdu), that is, "after that".
The fourth seal of the sūra. The mould was treated at 26/8-9; I do not repeat it.
كَذَّبَتْ عَادٌ ٱلْمُرْسَلِينَ · إِذْ قَالَ لَهُمْ أَخُوهُمْ هُودٌ أَلَا تَتَّقُونَ · إِنِّى لَكُمْ رَسُولٌ أَمِينٌ · فَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَأَطِيعُونِ · وَمَآ أَسْـَٔلُكُمْ عَلَيْهِ مِنْ أَجْرٍ ۖ إِنْ أَجْرِىَ إِلَّا عَلَىٰ رَبِّ ٱلْعَٰلَمِينَ
Kadhdhabat ʿĀdun'il-mursalīn · Idh qāla lahum akhūhum Hūdun alā tattaqūn · Innī lakum rasūlun amīn · Fa'ttaqū'llāha wa aṭīʿūn · Wa mā asʾalukum ʿalayhi min ajrin; in ajriya illā ʿalā rabbi'l-ʿālamīn
"ʿĀd too denied the messengers. · When their brother Hūd said to them: 'Will you not guard yourselves? · I am a trustworthy messenger sent to you. · So guard yourselves against God and obey me. · I ask you no wage for it; my wage falls only upon the Lord of all the worlds.'"
All five of the five verses are the shared mould of the sūra; the word analyses were made in the introductory section on 26/105-191 and are not repeated.
The only difference from the account of Noah is the name of those addressed: ʿĀd in place of qawmu Nūḥ, Hūd in place of Nūḥ.
ʿĀd is one of the two peoples the Qurʾān names as belonging to the Arabian peninsula (the other is Thamūd). The Qurʾān associates them with the region of al-Aḥqāf (al-Aḥqāf 46/21 — treated in al-Aḥqāf) and names Iram (al-Fajr 89/6-8 — treated in al-Fajr).
What was recorded in al-Fajr holds here too and I do not repeat it: Sūrat al-Fajr names ʿĀd as irama dhāti'l-ʿimād ("Iram of the pillars") and says allatī lam yukhlaq mithluhā fi'l-bilād ("the like of which was not created in the lands").
And the ʿĀd section of al-Shuʿarāʾ treats exactly this: buildings. The hundred and twenty-eighth and hundred and twenty-ninth verses are the counterpart of the note about ʿimād ("pillars") in al-Fajr. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
And the manner of ʿĀd's destruction (the wind) was treated at al-Qamar 54/18-21 and at al-Ḥāqqa 69/6-8. Al-Shuʿarāʾ does not say the manner of the destruction — it says only fa-ahlaknāhum (139). This is a difference that can be verified from the text.
أَتَبْنُونَ بِكُلِّ رِيعٍ ءَايَةً تَعْبَثُونَ · وَتَتَّخِذُونَ مَصَانِعَ لَعَلَّكُمْ تَخْلُدُونَ · وَإِذَا بَطَشْتُم بَطَشْتُمْ جَبَّارِينَ
A-tabnūna bi-kulli rīʿin āyatan taʿbathūn · Wa tattakhidhūna maṣāniʿa laʿallakum takhludūn · Wa idhā baṭashtum baṭashtum jabbārīn
"Do you build a monument on every high place, to no purpose? · And take for yourselves strongholds, as though you would abide for ever? · And when you seize, you seize like tyrants!"
The most detailed list of offences a prophet directs at his people in the sūra is here. And the structure of the list must be recorded:
| Verse | Verb | Field | Mould |
|---|---|---|---|
| 128 | Tabnūna — building | The monument | Question (a-) |
| 129 | Tattakhidhūna — taking | The structure | Attached to the question |
| 130 | Baṭashtum — seizing | The use of force | Statement (a conditional sentence) |
The first two are questions, the third a judgement. And the first two concern making, the third behaving.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the arrangement of the three verses: the list begins with stone and arrives at the human being. First what they build, then how they behave. And all three look to the same core: the claim to permanence.
The root ر-ي-ع: the senses the lexicographers give are to rise, to increase, to multiply. The renderings transmitted for rīʿ:
| Rendering | Ground |
|---|---|
| A high hill, a rise beside a road | The most widely transmitted sense |
| A mountain pass, a fork in the road | Rīʿ — the rising part of a road |
| A high place, a ridge | The root's core of "rising" |
And bi-kulli must be recorded: "on every". What is spoken of, that is, is not a single structure but a widespread practice: one on every rise.
The word occurs eight times in the sūra in the seal (inna fī dhālika la-āyatan) and had occurred in the fourth verse as well (mina's-samāʾi āyatan).
Here its sense is different, and the rendering the lexicographers give is: a mark, a sign, a landmark. This is already the core of the root (أ-ي-ي): a sign that makes a thing known.
So āyatan here means not "a miracle" but "a marker set up" — a structure built to be seen from afar.
And this is one of the most striking repetitions of a word in the sūra. I record it as my own reading: at the end of every account the sūra says "in this there is a sign". The people of ʿĀd, meanwhile, erect their own signs — one on every hill. One side sets up a sign, the other side does not see the sign that has been left. That this link is intended is not stated in the text; the two uses of the word are a datum of the text.
The root ع-ب-ث: to do a thing without purpose or use; to trifle. ʿAbath — idle work, aimless occupation. The Qurʾān negates the same root of creation: a-fa-ḥasibtum annamā khalaqnākum ʿabathā (al-Muʾminūn 23/115).
A point of word order: the verb taʿbathūn stands in the sentence as a circumstantial clause — "doing it to no purpose", "trifling". The offence, that is, is not the erecting of a structure; it is the manner of the erecting.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the position of the word in the sentence: the verse does not forbid building. It criticises purposelessness. ʿAbath is not a thing's having no use but the doer's regarding no purpose.
The root ص-ن-ع: to make, to manufacture, to work with skill. The plural of maṣnaʿ, maṣāniʿ: a thing made, a work of manufacture.
| Rendering | Ground |
|---|---|
| Solid structures, strongholds, palaces | The root's sense of "making with skill" |
| Water cisterns, reservoirs | In Arabic the word maṣnaʿ is used for a structure in which water is stored as well |
| Large works of manufacture generally | The widest sense of the root |
I do not impose a preference. Both renderings accord with the continuation of the verse, because both are things made for permanence: a stronghold and a cistern are alike structures directed at the future.
The root خ-ل-د: to be lasting, to continue on. It is used often in the Qurʾān of the garden and of the fire (khālidīna fīhā).
And laʿalla must be recorded: in the third verse (laʿallaka bākhiʿun) it was recorded that this particle announces not expectation but anxiety. Here its function is different: it announces mockery or intent. The lexicographers explain it as "as though you would abide for ever".
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the shared structure of the two verses: in 128 taʿbathūn (purposelessness), in 129 takhludūn (the claim to permanence). The two verses stand like opposites of one another — one to pursue no purpose at all, the other to pursue the greatest purpose. And the two are side by side in the same list. What they have in common is that both stand in the wrong place: a structure is built neither to pass the time nor for everlastingness.
al-Burūj 85/12 (inna baṭsha rabbika la-shadīd) — the detailed analysis of the root was made there. The description there: baṭsh is to grasp a thing violently and harshly, to seize by force. And something important was recorded there: the Qurʾān uses this root both of God and of wrongdoers. Indeed this verse (al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/130) was already cited in al-Burūj — "This sentence Hūd says to his own people."
al-Qamar 54/36 (wa laqad andharahum baṭshatanā) — there the difference between baṭsha (the faʿla pattern, a single occurrence) and baṭsh (the verbal noun) was tabulated. I do not repeat it.
| Element | Expression | Its work |
|---|---|---|
| Condition | Idhā baṭashtum | "When you seize" |
| Apodosis | Baṭashtum | "You seize" |
| Circumstantial | Jabbārīn | "As tyrants" |
The sentence thus stands like a tautology: "when you seize, you seize." And all the weight is in the last word: jabbārīn.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the structure itself: the verse takes as its subject not the act but the manner of the act. Seizing in itself is not counted an offence — governing, punishing, defending may require seizing. What is an offence is that the seizing is done as tyrants.
And the conditional particle is idhā, not in. As was recorded in the thirty-first verse, in Arabic in is used for the doubtful, idhā for the certain and recurring case. The verse therefore does not say "if you seize"; it says "whenever you seize". This announces that the behaviour is not an exception but a rule.
جَبَّارِين — root ج-ب-ر: the core the lexicographers give is to set a broken bone back in place by force, to mend (jabīra — a splint for a fracture; the jabr of mathematics — English algebra — comes from here as well). And from there it passes to "to make someone do a thing by force, to make submit".
| Use | Example | Sense |
|---|---|---|
| Of God | Al-ʿAzīzu'l-Jabbāru'l-Mutakabbir (al-Ḥashr 59/23) | The one who sets right, who carries His will through |
| Of a human | Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/130; jabbāran shaqiyyā (Maryam 19/32) | A tyrant |
This distinction was treated in al-Ḥashr and I do not repeat it. The note there: the same attribute means "the one who sets right" of the one whose power is unlimited, and "a tyrant" of the one whose power is limited. The difference lies in whom the attribute is found.
And the verse recorded at Qāf 50/45 attaches here: wa mā anta ʿalayhim bi-jabbār — "you are not a tyrant over them". The Qurʾān, that is, counts the attribute it forbids to the messenger as the deed of the people of ʿĀd. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
The picture the three verses build together is concrete: a society is measured by the structures it produces and by the force it uses. And the measure is not what is done but why and how it is done — a monument with no purpose, a structure that hopes for everlastingness, a force used without measure.
None of the verses forbids building, wealth or power. What is criticised in all three is the same false assumption: being permanent. And one account later the sūra will show the same assumption once more from the mouth of Thamūd — wa tanḥitūna mina'l-jibāli buyūtan fārihīn (149).
فَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَأَطِيعُونِ · وَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱلَّذِىٓ أَمَدَّكُم بِمَا تَعْلَمُونَ · أَمَدَّكُم بِأَنْعَٰمٍ وَبَنِينَ · وَجَنَّٰتٍ وَعُيُونٍ · إِنِّىٓ أَخَافُ عَلَيْكُمْ عَذَابَ يَوْمٍ عَظِيمٍ
Fa'ttaqū'llāha wa aṭīʿūn · Wa'ttaqu'lladhī amaddakum bimā taʿlamūn · Amaddakum bi-anʿāmin wa banīn · Wa jannātin wa ʿuyūn · Innī akhāfu ʿalaykum ʿadhāba yawmin ʿaẓīm
"So guard yourselves against God and obey me. · Guard yourselves against Him who has supplied you with what you know: · He has supplied you with cattle and sons, · and gardens and springs. · Truly I fear for you the punishment of a great day."
The sentence occurs for the second time in this account (126 and 131), and between them lies a three-verse list of offences. What this means was treated in Table 4 of the section "The backbone of the sūra"; I do not repeat it.
The root م-د-د: to extend, to draw out, to keep going without break. Madd — extension. Form IV (amadda) generally has the sense of nourishing with help and support: to supply continually.
| Verse | Expression | Object |
|---|---|---|
| 132 | Amaddakum bimā taʿlamūn | Indefinite — "with what you know" |
| 133 | Amaddakum bi-anʿāmin wa banīn | Definite — it is enumerated |
The verse says the general first, then enumerates. In Arabic this is called the general (ijmāl) followed by the detail (tafṣīl), and it serves to draw attention.
And bimā taʿlamūn must be recorded: "with what you know". No new knowledge is brought as proof; what those addressed already know is made the proof.
| Favour | Verse | Where else in the sūra |
|---|---|---|
| Anʿām — cattle | 133 | — |
| Banīn — sons | 133 | 88 — lā yanfaʿu mālun wa lā banūn |
| Jannāt — gardens | 134 | 57 — min jannātin wa ʿuyūn (taken from the people of Pharaoh) |
| ʿUyūn — springs | 134 | 57, 147 (given to Thamūd) |
The sūra thus uses the same two words (jannāt and ʿuyūn) of three different peoples: they are taken from the people of Pharaoh (57), given to ʿĀd (134), given to Thamūd (147).
This is a repetition that can be verified from the text. And as my own reading I record this: the sūra gives the same thing to three different peoples in the same words, and in all three the outcome is the same. The kind of the favour does not change; the attitude of those who receive it changes — and the seal follows all three with the same sentence.
The preposition is ʿalā. Not akhāfu minkum ("I fear you") but akhāfu ʿalaykum ("I fear on your behalf").
And this can be compared with the fourteenth verse of the sūra: Moses had said fa-akhāfu an yaqtulūn — fear for himself. Here Hūd fears for those he addresses.
| Verse | Who | Expression | Direction of the fear |
|---|---|---|---|
| 12 | Moses | Akhāfu an yukadhdhibūn | For himself |
| 14 | Moses | Fa-akhāfu an yaqtulūn | For himself |
| 135 | Hūd | Akhāfu ʿalaykum | For those he addresses |
This is a difference that can be verified from the text. And it stands on the same line as the third verse of the sūra: the burden the messenger carries for those he addresses.
عَذَابَ يَوْمٍ عَظِيم — the construction occurs three times in the sūra: 135 (Hūd), 156 (Ṣāliḥ), 189 (Shuʿayb — as ʿadhāba yawmin ʿaẓīm). The same expression in three different accounts. This is a repetition that can be verified from the text.
قَالُوا۟ سَوَآءٌ عَلَيْنَآ أَوَعَظْتَ أَمْ لَمْ تَكُن مِّنَ ٱلْوَٰعِظِينَ · إِنْ هَٰذَآ إِلَّا خُلُقُ ٱلْأَوَّلِينَ · وَمَا نَحْنُ بِمُعَذَّبِينَ · فَكَذَّبُوهُ فَأَهْلَكْنَٰهُمْ ۗ إِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ لَءَايَةً ۖ وَمَا كَانَ أَكْثَرُهُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ · وَإِنَّ رَبَّكَ لَهُوَ ٱلْعَزِيزُ ٱلرَّحِيمُ
Qālū sawāʾun ʿalaynā a-waʿaẓta am lam takun mina'l-wāʿiẓīn · In hādhā illā khuluqu'l-awwalīn · Wa mā naḥnu bi-muʿadhdhabīn · Fa-kadhdhabūhu fa-ahlaknāhum; inna fī dhālika la-āyatan wa mā kāna aktharuhum muʾminīn · Wa inna rabbaka la-huwa'l-ʿazīzu'r-raḥīm
"They said: 'It is all one to us whether you admonish or are not of those who admonish. · This is nothing but the custom of the ancients. · And we are not going to be punished.' · So they denied him, and We destroyed them. In this there is surely a sign; but most of them were not believers. · And your Lord — He indeed — is the Mighty, the Merciful."
The root س-و-ي was analysed in the ninety-eighth verse (nusawwīkum), and the sense "to hold equal" was recorded there. Here the same root comes as sawāʾ: "equal, it makes no difference".
And a point of word order: the answer does not discuss the content of the admonition. It equates the admonition's existing with its not existing.
The same mould occurs in several places in the Qurʾān: sawāʾun ʿalayhim a-andhartahum am lam tundhirhum lā yuʾminūn (al-Baqara 2/6; Yā Sīn 36/10 — treated in Yāsīn). The difference must be recorded: there the narrator frames the sentence; here the people themselves say it.
| Place | Who says it |
|---|---|
| Al-Baqara 2/6, Yā Sīn 36/10 | The narrator — as a judgement |
| Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/136 | The people themselves — as a confession |
And the mould a-waʿaẓta am lam takun mina'l-wāʿiẓīn must be recorded: the two sides are not symmetrical. The first side is a verb (waʿaẓta — you admonished), the second side a noun (lam takun mina'l-wāʿiẓīn — you were not of those who admonish).
The transmitted explanation: the second side negates not the act but the attribute — that is, not "not to admonish" but "not to be an admonisher". This is another instance of the "assignment to a group" mould that occurs often in the sūra (tabulated in the section on 26/29-31).
| Reading | Word | Root | Sense |
|---|---|---|---|
| khuluq | خُلُق | خ-ل-ق (trait, character) | "The custom, the way of the ancients" — this is something the ancients made up |
| khalq | خَلْق | خ-ل-ق (creating) | "The fabrication of the ancients" or "what has come down from of old" |
Both readings are transmitted, and both are from the same root; the difference is in the vowelling. The difference of sense is not great: on either reading the people count the admonition as "something that has been going on from of old".
| Direction | Its meaning |
|---|---|
| It looks to the admonition | "This threat is a tale the ancients made up" |
| It looks to their own life | "What we do is what our forefathers did too" |
I do not impose a preference. The second direction belongs to the same family as the proof from the forefathers in the seventy-fourth verse — it was treated in al-Zukhruf and Luqmān and I rely on those treatments.
| Order | Sentence | What it does |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Sawāʾun ʿalaynā | Declaring the admonition ineffective |
| 2 | In hādhā illā khuluqu'l-awwalīn | Denying the source of the admonition |
| 3 | Wa mā naḥnu bi-muʿadhdhabīn | Denying the outcome |
The third sentence is reinforced with the mā … bi- mould (this mould was treated in the hundred and fourteenth verse): "we are never going to be punished."
I record this as an observation about the structure: the people say mā naḥnu bi-muʿadhdhabīn; the text says ahlaknāhum. There is not even one verse between the two sentences. And how the destruction came about is not recounted — only that it did.
The hundred and thirty-ninth verse is one of the two of the sūra's eight seals that carry an addition (the other is 158). This was treated in Table 1 of the section "The backbone of the sūra", and an explanation was proposed there; I do not repeat it.
What is to be added here is a note on word order: the addition consists of two verbs, and both are joined with fāʾ.
فَ (fāʾ al-taʿqīb) announces succession without interval. No distance, that is, is put between the two verbs: they denied, We destroyed.
And as was recorded in al-Ṣāffāt, this is precisely the difference between fāʾ and thumma: thumma puts time in between, fāʾ does not. In the account of Noah the destruction had come with thumma (thumma aghraqnā, 120) — there was time enough there for an ark to be built. Here there is fāʾ.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the difference between the two particles. This is an explanation, not a ruling.
The fifth seal of the sūra. The mould was treated at 26/8-9.
كَذَّبَتْ ثَمُودُ ٱلْمُرْسَلِينَ · إِذْ قَالَ لَهُمْ أَخُوهُمْ صَٰلِحٌ أَلَا تَتَّقُونَ · إِنِّى لَكُمْ رَسُولٌ أَمِينٌ · فَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَأَطِيعُونِ · وَمَآ أَسْـَٔلُكُمْ عَلَيْهِ مِنْ أَجْرٍ ۖ إِنْ أَجْرِىَ إِلَّا عَلَىٰ رَبِّ ٱلْعَٰلَمِينَ
Kadhdhabat Thamūdu'l-mursalīn · Idh qāla lahum akhūhum Ṣāliḥun alā tattaqūn · Innī lakum rasūlun amīn · Fa'ttaqū'llāha wa aṭīʿūn · Wa mā asʾalukum ʿalayhi min ajrin; in ajriya illā ʿalā rabbi'l-ʿālamīn
"Thamūd too denied the messengers. · When their brother Ṣāliḥ said to them: 'Will you not guard yourselves? · I am a trustworthy messenger sent to you. · So guard yourselves against God and obey me. · I ask you no wage for it; my wage falls only upon the Lord of all the worlds.'"
All five of the five verses are the shared mould of the sūra; the word analyses were made in the introductory section on 26/105-191 and are not repeated.
Thamūd is one of the peoples the Qurʾān names most often, and it has occurred in many places in this commentary: al-Qamar 54/23-31 (the she-camel and the ṣayḥa), al-Fajr 89/9 (alladhīna jābū'ṣ-ṣakhra bi'l-wād — "those who hollowed the rocks in the valley"), al-Shams 91/11-15 (those who hamstrung the she-camel), al-Ḥāqqa 69/5 (fa-uhlikū bi'ṭ-ṭāghiya), al-Dhāriyāt 51/43-45.
Al-Shuʿarāʾ's own contribution is the enumeration of what the people stand to lose (146-149). The other sūras recount the she-camel and the destruction; al-Shuʿarāʾ first counts what they possess.
أَتُتْرَكُونَ فِى مَا هَٰهُنَآ ءَامِنِينَ · فِى جَنَّٰتٍ وَعُيُونٍ · وَزُرُوعٍ وَنَخْلٍ طَلْعُهَا هَضِيمٌ · وَتَنْحِتُونَ مِنَ ٱلْجِبَالِ بُيُوتًا فَٰرِهِينَ · فَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَأَطِيعُونِ · وَلَا تُطِيعُوٓا۟ أَمْرَ ٱلْمُسْرِفِينَ · ٱلَّذِينَ يُفْسِدُونَ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ وَلَا يُصْلِحُونَ
A-tutrakūna fī mā hāhunā āminīn · Fī jannātin wa ʿuyūn · Wa zurūʿin wa nakhlin ṭalʿuhā haḍīm · Wa tanḥitūna mina'l-jibāli buyūtan fārihīn · Fa'ttaqū'llāha wa aṭīʿūn · Wa lā tuṭīʿū amra'l-musrifīn · Alladhīna yufsidūna fi'l-arḍi wa lā yuṣliḥūn
"Will you be left secure in what is here — · in gardens and springs, · in fields and palm trees with their laden spathes? · And you carve houses out of the mountains with skill. · So guard yourselves against God and obey me. · And do not obey the command of those who exceed all measure — · who spread corruption in the earth and do not set it right."
And the verb is passive: tutrakūna — "will you be left?" By whom they will be left is not said. The question, that is, looks not to the act of an agent but to a state.
And a point of word order must be recorded: the question opens with a- and is a question of denial (istifhām inkārī) — it expects no answer; it seeks to draw a "no".
فِى مَا هَٰهُنَآ — word for word: "in the midst of what is here." هَٰهُنَا — "here" (a demonstrative of near place).
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the vagueness of the expression: the verse does not say "in your possessions" or "in your land". It says "in the midst of what is here" — and then enumerates. The question first names a general feeling of security, then sets out the things that feeling rests on.
And an overlap within the sūra must be recorded: the same root is the attribute by which Ṣāliḥ introduces himself — innī lakum rasūlun amīn (143). Three verses lie between the two.
The same root, two different directions: one who gives security, and those who suppose themselves secure. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text; what it means is interpretation.
The first two are the same as those given to the people of ʿĀd (134). Two more are added for Thamūd: crops and dates — that is, agriculture.
طَلْع — the first bud the palm tree puts out, the cluster while still in its sheath. The word occurs in several places in the Qurʾān (al-Anʿām 6/99; Qāf 50/10 — treated in Qāf).
هَضِيم — root ه-ض-م: to soften, to be crushed, to digest (haḍm is from the same root). The renderings transmitted for haḍīm:
| Rendering | Ground |
|---|---|
| Soft, tender | The root's sense of "softening" |
| Layered, dense, full | A cluster grown into itself from the abundance of fruit |
| Drooping with its weight | A cluster bending because it is full |
All three are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. What the three have in common: fruitfulness and ripeness.
I record this as an observation: the verse names the palm not as a tree but by the state of its fruit. What is counted, that is, is not property but what the property yields.
And the verb must be recorded: the structure is not built, it is carved. These are two different works: to build is to set stone upon stone, to carve is to make by taking away from existing rock.
And the verse recorded at al-Fajr 89/9 attaches here: wa Thamūda'lladhīna jābū'ṣ-ṣakhra bi'l-wād — "and Thamūd, who hollowed the rocks in the valley". The same people, the same work, two different verbs (naḥata and jāba). This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
| Reading | Sense | The sentence's meaning |
|---|---|---|
| With skill, skilfully | Fārih — expert, skilled | "You carve houses with skill" — it describes the skill |
| Exultantly, boastfully | Fārih — grown insolent from ease | "You carve houses exultantly" — it describes the attitude |
Both readings are transmitted, and the root of the word admits of both. Among the variant readings the reading fariḥīn is also transmitted, and it brings forward the sense of "joy, insolence". I do not impose a preference.
And I record an observation: both senses do work in the same list. If the sense of skill is taken, the verse takes as its subject not the craftsmanship but what the craftsmanship is spent on — because immediately after comes "guard yourselves against God". If the sense of insolence is taken, the verse takes the attitude directly as its subject.
| ʿĀd — 128-129 | Thamūd — 149 | |
|---|---|---|
| Verb | Tabnūna (building), tattakhidhūna (taking) | Tanḥitūna (carving) |
| Object | Āyatan (a marker), maṣāniʿa (strongholds) | Buyūtan (houses) |
| Quality | Taʿbathūn (to no purpose), takhludūn (abiding for ever) | Fārihīn (with skill / exultantly) |
| Material | What is made | The mountain |
Both peoples are named by their buildings, and in both what is criticised is not the building itself but the meaning loaded onto it. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
And as was recorded in al-Burūj and al-Fajr, the Qurʾān often names these two peoples side by side. Al-Shuʿarāʾ keeps the same order: ʿĀd (123-140), then Thamūd (141-159).
And here a prohibition is set opposite the command wa aṭīʿūn ("obey me") repeated in the five accounts: wa lā tuṭīʿū amra'l-musrifīn.
| Verse | Expression | To whom |
|---|---|---|
| 150 | Wa aṭīʿūn | The messenger — a command |
| 151 | Wa lā tuṭīʿū amra'l-musrifīn | Those who exceed all measure — a prohibition |
This is an overlap that can be verified from the text, and among the five accounts it is present only with Ṣāliḥ.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the adjacency of the two verses: the call does not only say "obey me"; it also says whose command is not to be obeyed. Obedience does not stand in a void — one direction is chosen, the other left.
The root س-ر-ف: to overstep the bound, to lose the measure. Isrāf means passing the limit not only in spending but in every field. The root was treated in Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) and at al-Zukhruf 43/5 (an kuntum qawman musrifīn).
And the word amr must be recorded: the prohibition is set not on the persons but on their command: lā tuṭīʿū amra'l-musrifīn. The matter, that is, is not the identity of the persons but the instruction they give.
And the question of who the musrifīn are is answered in the next verse by a description. This accords with the principle of the sūra (recorded in the section on 26/10-11): the judgement is built not on identity but on attribute.
The root ف-س-د: the breakdown of a thing's order, its becoming useless. The root ص-ل-ح: to become sound, to become fit and useful. The two roots are constantly set against one another in the Qurʾān.
The transmitted explanation: the second clause is not a repetition of the first. The first clause says what is done, the second what is not done. The description, that is, has two wings: to corrupt and not to set right.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is that the second clause has been added: yufsidūn alone would have sufficed. The added clause sets down, beside corrupting, a separate note of failing to set right. A corrupter's defending himself with "I am not doing anything" is met by the second wing of the verse.
قَالُوٓا۟ إِنَّمَآ أَنتَ مِنَ ٱلْمُسَحَّرِينَ · مَآ أَنتَ إِلَّا بَشَرٌ مِّثْلُنَا فَأْتِ بِـَٔايَةٍ إِن كُنتَ مِنَ ٱلصَّٰدِقِينَ · قَالَ هَٰذِهِۦ نَاقَةٌ لَّهَا شِرْبٌ وَلَكُمْ شِرْبُ يَوْمٍ مَّعْلُومٍ · وَلَا تَمَسُّوهَا بِسُوٓءٍ فَيَأْخُذَكُمْ عَذَابُ يَوْمٍ عَظِيمٍ · فَعَقَرُوهَا فَأَصْبَحُوا۟ نَٰدِمِينَ · فَأَخَذَهُمُ ٱلْعَذَابُ ۗ إِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ لَءَايَةً ۖ وَمَا كَانَ أَكْثَرُهُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ · وَإِنَّ رَبَّكَ لَهُوَ ٱلْعَزِيزُ ٱلرَّحِيمُ
Qālū innamā anta mina'l-musaḥḥarīn · Mā anta illā basharun mithlunā fa'ti bi-āyatin in kunta mina'ṣ-ṣādiqīn · Qāla hādhihi nāqatun lahā shirbun wa lakum shirbu yawmin maʿlūm · Wa lā tamassūhā bi-sūʾin fa-yaʾkhudhakum ʿadhābu yawmin ʿaẓīm · Fa-ʿaqarūhā fa-aṣbaḥū nādimīn · Fa-akhadhahumu'l-ʿadhāb; inna fī dhālika la-āyatan wa mā kāna aktharuhum muʾminīn · Wa inna rabbaka la-huwa'l-ʿazīzu'r-raḥīm
"They said: 'You are only one of the bewitched. · You are nothing but a mortal like us. Bring a sign, if you are one of the truthful!' · He said: 'This is a she-camel. She has a turn to drink, and you have a turn on a known day. · Do not touch her with harm, or the punishment of a great day will seize you.' · But they hamstrung her; then they became regretful. · And the punishment seized them. In this there is surely a sign; but most of them were not believers. · And your Lord — He indeed — is the Mighty, the Merciful."
مُسَحَّر — root س-ح-ر, the passive participle of Form II. And the word has been read in two different directions:
| Reading | The sense taken of the root | Meaning |
|---|---|---|
| Bewitched | Siḥr — sorcery | "Sorcery has been worked on you, your mind is confused" |
| One who has a lung, who eats and drinks | Saḥar — the lung | "You too are a human being who eats and drinks like us" |
The second reading is transmitted among the lexicographers: saḥar in Arabic means the lung, and musaḥḥar means "possessor of a lung", that is, a mortal.
And the next verse supports the second reading: mā anta illā basharun mithlunā — "you are nothing but a mortal like us". Verse 154, that is, stands as though it were explaining verse 153.
And what the two readings have in common is this: both classify the messenger. Either "a man whose mind is disordered" or "an ordinary human being". What he says is not discussed.
| Verse | Accusation | Of whom | Who says it |
|---|---|---|---|
| 27 | La-majnūn | Moses | Pharaoh |
| 34 | Sāḥirun ʿalīm | Moses | Pharaoh |
| 153 | Mina'l-musaḥḥarīn | Ṣāliḥ | Thamūd |
| 185 | Mina'l-musaḥḥarīn | Shuʿayb | The people of al-Ayka |
| 186 | La-mina'l-kādhibīn | Shuʿayb | The people of al-Ayka |
| 224-226 | Poet (indirectly) | The messenger addressed | (the accusation the sūra answers) |
All the accusations directed at the five messengers in the sūra are thus of the same kind: the speech is not discussed, the speaker is classified. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text and it explains why the final section of the sūra takes poets as its subject. This link will be treated in the section on 224-227.
| Verse | Expression | Who |
|---|---|---|
| 4 | In nashaʾ nunazzil ʿalayhim mina's-samāʾi āyatan | God — it is not sent down |
| 31 | Fa'ti bihi in kunta mina'ṣ-ṣādiqīn | Pharaoh — a demand |
| 154 | Fa'ti bi-āyatin in kunta mina'ṣ-ṣādiqīn | Thamūd — a demand |
| 187 | Fa-asqiṭ ʿalaynā kisafan mina's-samāʾ | The people of al-Ayka — a demand |
Three peoples, the same demand three times. And 31 and 154 are almost exactly the same (in kunta mina'ṣ-ṣādiqīn).
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the comparison of these four verses: in the fourth verse the sūra had said "if it were willed a sign would be sent down from heaven and the necks would bow". It then shows three peoples asking for the same thing. And to Thamūd a sign is given (155) — and the outcome does not change. The sūra, that is, tests the judgement of the fourth verse by an account.
The root ن-و-ق: a female camel. The Qurʾān speaks of this she-camel in many places (al-Aʿrāf 7/73; Hūd 11/64; al-Isrāʾ 17/59; al-Qamar 54/27; al-Shams 91/13) and it was treated in al-Qamar and al-Shams.
What is peculiar to al-Shuʿarāʾ's telling must be recorded: here it is not said how the she-camel came. Hādhihi nāqatun — "this is a she-camel". It is only pointed to.
I do not enter into a detail the Qurʾān does not give: reports are transmitted that the she-camel came out of a rock; this is not in the Qurʾān.
And the order itself must be recorded: the water is apportioned day by day. One day for the she-camel, one for the people. And at al-Qamar 54/28 the same order is stated more plainly: wa nabbiʾhum anna'l-māʾa qismatun baynahum — "and inform them that the water is apportioned among them".
I record this as an observation: the subject of the trial is not a belief but keeping to an order of sharing. The one thing asked of the people is not to break the turn of the water.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the choice of the verb: the prohibition begins not from the extreme act (killing) but from the smallest contact. And the people break the prohibition at the extreme point: fa-ʿaqarūhā.
The root ع-ق-ر: the sense the lexicographers give is to cut the leg tendon of an animal, to wound it at the root. The word is not "to kill" (qatala); it is to bring the camel down by cutting its leg, and this was the Arabs' method of slaughtering a camel.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the order of the two verses: the regret does not stop the punishment. And the verse does not say what kind of regret it was — repentance, or the rueful regret felt on seeing the consequence? The text does not distinguish.
| Explanation | Ground |
|---|---|
| They became regretful on seeing the signs of the punishment | Elsewhere the Qurʾān speaks of a respite of three days (Hūd 11/65) |
| They became regretful on grasping the consequence of what they had done | No sign is named in the verse |
I do not impose a preference. What is to be recorded is this: the Qurʾān records elsewhere too that not every kind of regret yields the same outcome — fa-lam yaku yanfaʿuhum īmānuhum lammā raʾaw baʾsanā (al-Muʾmin 40/85 — treated in Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin)).
The hundred and fifty-eighth verse is the second of the sūra's eight seals to carry an addition (the other is 139). This was treated in Table 1 of the section "The backbone of the sūra"; I do not repeat it.
What is to be added here is a note on a word: the addition is in the form fa-akhadhahumu'l-ʿadhāb, and the verb is the same as the verb Ṣāliḥ used in the hundred and fifty-sixth verse: fa-yaʾkhudhakum ʿadhābu yawmin ʿaẓīm.
The verb used in the warning, that is, is repeated unchanged in the fulfilment. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text. And it stands on the same line as the principle recorded in al-Burūj: the outcome is announced in the language of the warning.
كَذَّبَتْ قَوْمُ لُوطٍ ٱلْمُرْسَلِينَ · إِذْ قَالَ لَهُمْ أَخُوهُمْ لُوطٌ أَلَا تَتَّقُونَ · إِنِّى لَكُمْ رَسُولٌ أَمِينٌ · فَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَأَطِيعُونِ · وَمَآ أَسْـَٔلُكُمْ عَلَيْهِ مِنْ أَجْرٍ ۖ إِنْ أَجْرِىَ إِلَّا عَلَىٰ رَبِّ ٱلْعَٰلَمِينَ · أَتَأْتُونَ ٱلذُّكْرَانَ مِنَ ٱلْعَٰلَمِينَ · وَتَذَرُونَ مَا خَلَقَ لَكُمْ رَبُّكُم مِّنْ أَزْوَٰجِكُم ۚ بَلْ أَنتُمْ قَوْمٌ عَادُونَ
Kadhdhabat qawmu Lūṭin'il-mursalīn · Idh qāla lahum akhūhum Lūṭun alā tattaqūn · Innī lakum rasūlun amīn · Fa'ttaqū'llāha wa aṭīʿūn · Wa mā asʾalukum ʿalayhi min ajrin; in ajriya illā ʿalā rabbi'l-ʿālamīn · A-taʾtūna'dh-dhukrāna mina'l-ʿālamīn · Wa tadharūna mā khalaqa lakum rabbukum min azwājikum; bal antum qawmun ʿādūn
"The people of Lot too denied the messengers. · When their brother Lot said to them: 'Will you not guard yourselves? · I am a trustworthy messenger sent to you. · So guard yourselves against God and obey me. · I ask you no wage for it; my wage falls only upon the Lord of all the worlds. · Do you go to the males out of all the worlds · and leave the mates your Lord created for you? Indeed you are a people who overstep the bound.'"
The first five verses are the shared mould of the sūra; the word analyses were made in the introductory section on 26/105-191 and are not repeated.
And in this account the sentence fa'ttaqū'llāha wa aṭīʿūn occurs once (163), with no second occurrence. What this means was treated in Table 4 of the section "The backbone of the sūra".
The accusation, that is, is not single-winged: the doing of one thing and the leaving of another are named together.
This is the brother of the yufsidūna … wa lā yuṣliḥūn structure in the account of Ṣāliḥ (152). In both accounts the description has two wings. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
And mina'l-ʿālamīn must be recorded: "out of all the worlds". The explanation the lexicographers give: the expression widens the scope of the act — whether from their own people or not.
And the word uses the same word as the construction rabbu'l-ʿālamīn, which occurs eleven times in the sūra. This is a repetition that can be verified from the text: the word ʿālamīn occurs in the sūra both as the whole to which the Lord is attributed and, here, as the whole out of which the act makes its selection.
And a point of word order must be recorded: the sentence has three elements, and all three look to the same side:
What is abandoned is thus qualified three times: created, for you, by your Lord. The sentence stresses not what is left but whom it comes from.
And the word azwājikum must be recorded. The root ز-و-ج was analysed in the seventh verse of the sūra (min kulli zawjin karīm), and the description recorded there holds here too: zawj is not "a pair" but "one member of a pair" — anything that has a mate.
The sūra thus uses the same root in two places: once of plants (7) and once of human beings (166). This is a repetition that can be verified from the text.
The root ع-د-و: to overstep the limit, to pass the bound, to transgress. From the same root: ʿaduww (enemy — it occurred in the seventy-seventh verse) and ʿudwān (aggression).
And the particle bal must be recorded: bal antum qawmun ʿādūn. In the seventy-fourth verse the same particle was in the people's mouth (bal wajadnā ābāʾanā); here it is in the messenger's. The particle announces the leaving of one statement and the passing to the real point: "the real matter is that you are a people who overstep the bound."
And that the description rests on an attribute must be recorded: qawmun ʿādūn is not the name of a community but an attribute. This is the same as the principle recorded in the eleventh verse of the sūra and accords with the principle recorded in Method: the judgement is built not on who they are but on what they do.
قَالُوا۟ لَئِن لَّمْ تَنتَهِ يَٰلُوطُ لَتَكُونَنَّ مِنَ ٱلْمُخْرَجِينَ · قَالَ إِنِّى لِعَمَلِكُم مِّنَ ٱلْقَالِينَ · رَبِّ نَجِّنِى وَأَهْلِى مِمَّا يَعْمَلُونَ · فَنَجَّيْنَٰهُ وَأَهْلَهُۥٓ أَجْمَعِينَ · إِلَّا عَجُوزًا فِى ٱلْغَٰبِرِينَ · ثُمَّ دَمَّرْنَا ٱلْءَاخَرِينَ · وَأَمْطَرْنَا عَلَيْهِم مَّطَرًا ۖ فَسَآءَ مَطَرُ ٱلْمُنذَرِينَ · إِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ لَءَايَةً ۖ وَمَا كَانَ أَكْثَرُهُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ · وَإِنَّ رَبَّكَ لَهُوَ ٱلْعَزِيزُ ٱلرَّحِيمُ
Qālū la-in lam tantahi yā Lūṭu la-takūnanna mina'l-mukhrajīn · Qāla innī li-ʿamalikum mina'l-qālīn · Rabbi najjinī wa ahlī mimmā yaʿmalūn · Fa-najjaynāhu wa ahlahu ajmaʿīn · Illā ʿajūzan fi'l-ghābirīn · Thumma dammarna'l-ākharīn · Wa amṭarnā ʿalayhim maṭarā; fa-sāʾa maṭaru'l-mundharīn · Inna fī dhālika la-āyatan wa mā kāna aktharuhum muʾminīn · Wa inna rabbaka la-huwa'l-ʿazīzu'r-raḥīm
"They said: 'Lot! If you do not stop, you will surely be among those driven out!' · He said: 'I am one of those who detest what you do. · My Lord! Save me and my household from what they do.' · So We saved him and all his household — · save an old woman among those who stayed behind. · Then We razed the others · and rained upon them a rain. How evil is the rain of those who were warned!' · In this there is surely a sign; but most of them were not believers. · And your Lord — He indeed — is the Mighty, the Merciful."
The sentence has exactly the same structure as the hundred and sixteenth verse, with one word of difference. This was tabulated in the section on 26/116-122; I do not repeat it.
What is to be added here is a note on the difference: Noah is threatened with stoning (marjūmīn), Lot with expulsion (mukhrajīn).
| Verse | Expression | Who drives out / is driven out |
|---|---|---|
| 35 | Yurīdu an yukhrijakum min arḍikum | Pharaoh's claim |
| 57 | Fa-akhrajnāhum min jannātin wa ʿuyūn | God — the people of Pharaoh |
| 167 | La-takūnanna mina'l-mukhrajīn | The people of Lot — a threat |
The same root (خ-ر-ج), three different scenes. This is a repetition that can be verified from the text. And in all three "driving from the land" is used as a display of power.
The root ق-ل-ي: to dislike intensely, to loathe, to detest. The lexicographers record that the word is the exact opposite of love, and note that another sense of the verb qalā is to roast (maqlī — roasted); they make the link between the two senses with the picture of "burning inside".
In this pattern the word occurs only here in the Qurʾān. Another derivative of the root occurs at al-Ḍuḥā 93/3: mā waddaʿaka rabbuka wa mā qalā — "your Lord has neither forsaken you nor turned against you" (treated in al-Ḍuḥā).
The object of the loathing is not the persons but the deed. The verse does not say innī lakum mina'l-qālīn ("I am one of those who detest you").
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the preposition (li-ʿamalikum): the distinction is plain in the sentence — the act is separated from the actor. And this is the textual counterpart of the principle recorded in Method: the judgement is built not on the persons themselves but on the act described.
And the next verse continues the same distinction: najjinī wa ahlī mimmā yaʿmalūn — "save me from what they do", not "from them".
In both verses the same root (ع-م-ل) and the same distinction. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
عَجُوز — an old woman. The Qurʾān gives no name here; that it is Lot's wife is understood from other places in the Qurʾān (Hūd 11/81; al-Taḥrīm 66/10 — treated in al-Taḥrīm).
The root غ-ب-ر: to remain behind, to be left over. Ghābir — one who stays behind, who remains after those who have gone. The word is repeated several times in the Qurʾān for this event (al-Aʿrāf 7/83; al-Ḥijr 15/60; al-Naml 27/57).
And the principle recorded in al-Taḥrīm attaches here: there, with the wives of Noah and of Lot given as examples, it was treated that closeness does not save. I rely on the note there.
And a point of word order: the exception comes immediately after the sentence of deliverance and limits the word ajmaʿīn ("all"). "All" is said, and then one person is taken out.
The root د-م-ر: to destroy, to raze. Form II (dammara) intensifies. And at al-Ṣāffāt 37/136 the same verb occurs of the same people: thumma dammarna'l-ākharīn — exactly the same sentence.
This is an overlap that can be verified from the text, and it binds the Lot sections of the two sūras together. As was recorded in al-Ṣāffāt, the Lot section there did not receive the closing seal; in al-Shuʿarāʾ it does.
The verb is reinforced with a verbal noun from its own root. And in Arabic this construction qualifies when it takes an adjective; here the qualification comes in the following clause: fa-sāʾa maṭaru'l-mundharīn — "how evil is the rain of those who were warned."
And what it was that rained is not said. The Qurʾān specifies it elsewhere (ḥijāratan min sijjīl — Hūd 11/82; al-Ḥijr 15/74). Al-Shuʿarāʾ does not specify. This is a difference that can be verified from the text.
ٱلْمُنذَرِين — a passive participle: those who have been warned. The sentence thus records with a word that the punishment did not come without warning. And this will tie to the two hundred and eighth verse of the sūra: wa mā ahlaknā min qaryatin illā lahā mundhirūn.
This is an overlap that can be verified from the text: here those warned (passive), there those who warn (active) — the same root.
The seventh seal of the sūra. The mould was treated at 26/8-9.
كَذَّبَ أَصْحَٰبُ لْـَٔيْكَةِ ٱلْمُرْسَلِينَ · إِذْ قَالَ لَهُمْ شُعَيْبٌ أَلَا تَتَّقُونَ · إِنِّى لَكُمْ رَسُولٌ أَمِينٌ · فَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَأَطِيعُونِ · وَمَآ أَسْـَٔلُكُمْ عَلَيْهِ مِنْ أَجْرٍ ۖ إِنْ أَجْرِىَ إِلَّا عَلَىٰ رَبِّ ٱلْعَٰلَمِينَ
Kadhdhaba aṣḥābu'l-Aykati'l-mursalīn · Idh qāla lahum Shuʿaybun alā tattaqūn · Innī lakum rasūlun amīn · Fa'ttaqū'llāha wa aṭīʿūn · Wa mā asʾalukum ʿalayhi min ajrin; in ajriya illā ʿalā rabbi'l-ʿālamīn
"The people of al-Ayka too denied the messengers. · When Shuʿayb said to them: 'Will you not guard yourselves? · I am a trustworthy messenger sent to you. · So guard yourselves against God and obey me. · I ask you no wage for it; my wage falls only upon the Lord of all the worlds.'"
These five verses are the fifth and last repetition of the sūra's shared mould — and here the mould breaks in two places.
| Break | The others | Here |
|---|---|---|
| Verb | Kadhdhabat (feminine) | Kadhdhaba (masculine) |
| Attribution | Akhūhum … ("their brother") | absent — only Shuʿaybun |
The reason for these two breaks and their connection with each other were treated in Table 2 of the section "The backbone of the sūra"; I do not repeat it. Its summary: those addressed are named not by a lineage but by a place (aṣḥābu'l-Ayka), and aṣḥāb is a masculine plural.
The word occurs in four places in the Qurʾān (al-Ḥijr 15/78; al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/176; Ṣād 38/13; Qāf 50/14) and was mentioned in Ṣād and Qāf.
And the people of Shuʿayb are named in the Qurʾān by two different names, and this must be recorded:
| Name | Where | Kind |
|---|---|---|
| Midian | Al-Aʿrāf 7/85; Hūd 11/84; al-ʿAnkabūt 29/36 | The name of a people / a town — akhūhum Shuʿayb is said |
| Aṣḥābu'l-Ayka | Al-Ḥijr 15/78; al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/176; Ṣād 38/13; Qāf 50/14 | A place name — akhūhum is not said |
And what the table shows is an order that can be verified from the text: where the Qurʾān says Midian it says akhūhum Shuʿayb; where it says al-Ayka it does not.
Whether these two are the same community or two different ones has been disputed. I give the transmitted views in a table; I do not impose a preference:
| View | Ground | Its weak side |
|---|---|---|
| The same community, two names | In both places there is the same prophet (Shuʿayb) and the same subject (measure and weight) | The difference over akhūhum has to be explained |
| Two different communities, the same prophet | The Qurʾān's not saying akhūhum is counted a mark of distinction; the manners of destruction are also recounted differently (ṣayḥa / rajfa — Midian; yawmu'ẓ-ẓulla — al-Ayka) | The Qurʾān does not openly say that they are two different communities |
And as was recorded at Ṣād 38/13, there aṣḥābu'l-Ayka is named in a series of destroyed communities and it is said ulāʾika'l-aḥzāb. I rely on the note there.
أَوْفُوا۟ ٱلْكَيْلَ وَلَا تَكُونُوا۟ مِنَ ٱلْمُخْسِرِينَ · وَزِنُوا۟ بِٱلْقِسْطَاسِ ٱلْمُسْتَقِيمِ · وَلَا تَبْخَسُوا۟ ٱلنَّاسَ أَشْيَآءَهُمْ وَلَا تَعْثَوْا۟ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ مُفْسِدِينَ · وَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱلَّذِى خَلَقَكُمْ وَٱلْجِبِلَّةَ ٱلْأَوَّلِينَ
Awfu'l-kayla wa lā takūnū mina'l-mukhsirīn · Wa zinū bi'l-qisṭāsi'l-mustaqīm · Wa lā tabkhasu'n-nāsa ashyāʾahum wa lā taʿthaw fi'l-arḍi mufsidīn · Wa'ttaqu'lladhī khalaqakum wa'l-jibillata'l-awwalīn
"Give full measure, and do not be of those who cause loss. · Weigh with the true balance. · And do not undervalue people's goods, and do not go about the earth spreading corruption. · And guard yourselves against Him who created you and the generations before."
This is the most concrete list of instructions given by a messenger in the sūra. And its field is a single one: trade.
| Verse | Expression | Kind | Field |
|---|---|---|---|
| 181a | Awfu'l-kayla | Command | The measure — volume |
| 181b | Lā takūnū mina'l-mukhsirīn | Prohibition | The measure |
| 182 | Zinū bi'l-qisṭāsi'l-mustaqīm | Command | The balance — weight |
| 183a | Lā tabkhasu'n-nāsa ashyāʾahum | Prohibition | Value — price |
| 183b | Lā taʿthaw fi'l-arḍi mufsidīn | Prohibition | General |
And the order is worth recording: volume → weight → value → the general order. The list, that is, begins with two concrete instruments of measure and widens to price, and from there to the order of the earth.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the arrangement of the four verses: the shortfall made in measuring is placed, in the language of the verse, not as a fault of trade but as a matter that touches the order of the earth.
The root ك-ي-ل: to measure with a measure (a measure of volume). Kayl — the measure and the act of measuring.
The root خ-س-ر: to fall short, to suffer loss. Form IV (akhsara) is transitive: to cause a shortfall, to cause loss. Mukhsir — one who causes a shortfall.
And this field was treated in detail in al-Muṭaffifīn and I rely on that treatment. The notes there were, in summary, these:
- The root ط-ف-ف (taṭfīf): to trifle at the edge, at the extremity of a thing — the small shortfall made in measuring.
- The verb used at al-Muṭaffifīn 83/3 is also from the root خ-س-ر: wa idhā kālūhum aw wazanūhum yukhsirūn.
- And the distinction recorded there: bakhs is the shortfall made in price, taṭfīf the shortfall made in quantity.
Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/181 and al-Muṭaffifīn 83/3, that is, use the same root. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text. And in al-Muṭaffifīn this verse (al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/183) was already cited.
قِسْطَاس — most of the lexicographers derive the word from the root ق-س-ط (justice, equity); some record that it may have entered Arabic from another language. I make no firm choice.
Its meaning: the balance, the instrument of weighing. The word occurs in two places in the Qurʾān: al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/182 and al-Isrāʾ 17/35 (wa zinū bi'l-qisṭāsi'l-mustaqīm — exactly the same sentence).
This is a datum that can be verified from the text: the same sentence is repeated unchanged in two sūras.
ٱلْمُسْتَقِيم — root ق-و-م, the active participle of Form X: straight, without deviation. The same word occurs in the construction ṣirāṭa'l-mustaqīm (analysed in al-Fātiḥa).
And mīzān was treated at al-Ḥadīd 57/25 and I rely on that treatment. The notes there were, in summary, these:
- Three things are sent down together: the Book, the balance, and iron. The Book represents the principle, the balance the instrument of measure, iron the safeguard.
- The case of "the Book present, the balance absent": the principle is there, the measure is not — everyone's justice in his own head.
What is to be added here is a link, and I record it as my own reading: at al-Ḥadīd 57/25 the balance is something sent down; at al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/182 the balance is something used. One takes as its subject the source of the measure, the other its use. And al-Shuʿarāʾ asks for the use from a prophet's mouth in the most everyday field of all: the market.
The root was analysed in al-Muṭaffifīn and I rely on that treatment. The description there: ب-خ-س — to take a thing by lowering its value, to give short of what is due.
And the distinction recorded there deserves to be repeated here, because Shuʿayb's list contains both:
| Root | Where the shortfall is made | The verse in al-Shuʿarāʾ |
|---|---|---|
| خ-س-ر / ط-ف-ف | In quantity — measure and weight | 181 |
| ب-خ-س | In price — in value | 183 |
In three verses, then, Shuʿayb closes off three different kinds of cheating: volume, weight, value. This is an order that can be verified from the text.
The best-known use of the root in the Qurʾān is in the account of Joseph: wa sharawhu bi-thamanin bakhsin darāhima maʿdūda (Yūsuf 12/20) — "and they sold him for a paltry price, a few counted dirhams". This example was recorded in al-Muṭaffifīn and al-Jinn.
And a point of word order must be recorded: lā tabkhasu'n-nāsa ashyāʾahum. The verb takes two objects: people and their goods. In Arabic this construction announces together from whom and in what the shortfall is made.
And the word ashyāʾ must be recorded: "things". The most general word of all. The prohibition, that is, looks not only to merchandise but to everything a person has a right to.
The transmitted explanations support this breadth: it is said that the word may be understood not only of property but of right, labour and standing as well. I transmit this as a view; no limit is set in the verse.
The root ع-ث-و / ع-ي-ث: to spread extreme corruption, to turn a thing upside down. The lexicographers record that the word is used for the most violent kind of corruption.
And mufsidīn comes as a circumstantial: "as corrupters". The act itself is already corruption; the circumstantial reinforces it.
The same sentence is repeated several times in the Qurʾān (al-Baqara 2/60; al-Aʿrāf 7/74; Hūd 11/85) and at Hūd 11/85 it occurs from Shuʿayb's mouth in almost the same order as in this verse: wa yā qawmi awfu'l-mikyāla wa'l-mīzāna bi'l-qisṭi wa lā tabkhasu'n-nāsa ashyāʾahum wa lā taʿthaw fi'l-arḍi mufsidīn.
This is an overlap that can be verified from the text: the two sūras give the same triad in the same order.
جِبِلَّة — root ج-ب-ل: the sense the lexicographers give is creation, constitution; a community created in a certain state. From the same root: jabal (mountain) and jibilla (constitution, nature). The word here means "generations, communities".
In this pattern the word occurs only here in the Qurʾān; another derivative occurs at Yā Sīn 36/62: wa laqad aḍalla minkum jibillan kathīrā.
And a point of word order must be recorded: the ground is extended into the past. Khalaqakum wa'l-jibillata'l-awwalīn — "who created you and the generations before".
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the parallel sentence in the ʿĀd section: Hūd too had used the same structure — wa'ttaqu'lladhī amaddakum bimā taʿlamūn (132). Both messengers, after saying "guard yourselves against God", add a relative clause.
| Account | Expression | Which verb |
|---|---|---|
| Hūd 26/132 | Wa'ttaqu'lladhī amaddakum bimā taʿlamūn | Giving — favour |
| Shuʿayb 26/184 | Wa'ttaqu'lladhī khalaqakum wa'l-jibillata'l-awwalīn | Creating — existence |
This is an overlap that can be verified from the text. And the difference is meaningful: ʿĀd is reminded of favour, al-Ayka of existence.
And a link can be made with the seventy-sixth verse: Abraham too, in answer to the proof from the forefathers, had said wa ābāʾukumu'l-aqdamūn. The sūra reaches back to "those who came before" in four places: 76 (al-aqdamūn), 137 (al-awwalīn), 184 (al-awwalīn), 196 (zuburi'l-awwalīn). This is a repetition that can be verified from the text.
قَالُوٓا۟ إِنَّمَآ أَنتَ مِنَ ٱلْمُسَحَّرِينَ · وَمَآ أَنتَ إِلَّا بَشَرٌ مِّثْلُنَا وَإِن نَّظُنُّكَ لَمِنَ ٱلْكَٰذِبِينَ · فَأَسْقِطْ عَلَيْنَا كِسَفًا مِّنَ ٱلسَّمَآءِ إِن كُنتَ مِنَ ٱلصَّٰدِقِينَ · قَالَ رَبِّىٓ أَعْلَمُ بِمَا تَعْمَلُونَ · فَكَذَّبُوهُ فَأَخَذَهُمْ عَذَابُ يَوْمِ ٱلظُّلَّةِ ۚ إِنَّهُۥ كَانَ عَذَابَ يَوْمٍ عَظِيمٍ · إِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ لَءَايَةً ۖ وَمَا كَانَ أَكْثَرُهُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ · وَإِنَّ رَبَّكَ لَهُوَ ٱلْعَزِيزُ ٱلرَّحِيمُ
Qālū innamā anta mina'l-musaḥḥarīn · Wa mā anta illā basharun mithlunā wa in naẓunnuka la-mina'l-kādhibīn · Fa-asqiṭ ʿalaynā kisafan mina's-samāʾi in kunta mina'ṣ-ṣādiqīn · Qāla rabbī aʿlamu bimā taʿmalūn · Fa-kadhdhabūhu fa-akhadhahum ʿadhābu yawmi'ẓ-ẓulla; innahu kāna ʿadhāba yawmin ʿaẓīm · Inna fī dhālika la-āyatan wa mā kāna aktharuhum muʾminīn · Wa inna rabbaka la-huwa'l-ʿazīzu'r-raḥīm
"They said: 'You are only one of the bewitched. · You are nothing but a mortal like us; and we think you are one of the liars. · Drop fragments of the sky upon us, if you are one of the truthful!' · He said: 'My Lord knows best what you do.' · They denied him, and thereupon the punishment of the day of the shadow seized them. It was indeed the punishment of a great day.' · In this there is surely a sign; but most of them were not believers. · And your Lord — He indeed — is the Mighty, the Merciful."
| Thamūd 153-154 | Al-Ayka 185-187 | |
|---|---|---|
| First sentence | Innamā anta mina'l-musaḥḥarīn | Innamā anta mina'l-musaḥḥarīn — the same |
| Second sentence | Mā anta illā basharun mithlunā | Wa mā anta illā basharun mithlunā — the same |
| Addition | none | Wa in naẓunnuka la-mina'l-kādhibīn |
| Demand | Fa'ti bi-āyatin — "bring a sign" | Fa-asqiṭ ʿalaynā kisafan mina's-samāʾ — "drop a fragment of the sky" |
I record this as an observation: when the answers of the five peoples in the sūra are set in order, the demands grow steadily harsher. And what the last people ask for is what will be given to them — they said fa-asqiṭ ʿalaynā, and fa-akhadhahum ʿadhābu yawmi'ẓ-ẓulla came about.
And the principle recorded in al-Burūj is at work here too: the outcome is announced in the language of the demand.
The word occurs in several places in the Qurʾān, and always together with the sky (al-Isrāʾ 17/92; al-Rūm 30/48; Sabaʾ 34/9; al-Ṭūr 52/44 — treated in al-Ṭūr).
And the verse recorded at al-Ṭūr 52/44 attaches here: wa in yaraw kisfan mina's-samāʾi sāqiṭan yaqūlū saḥābun markūm — "if they saw a fragment of the sky falling they would say, 'piled-up clouds'". The Qurʾān, that is, records in another sūra that even when the thing asked for is given it will be interpreted otherwise.
I record this link as a reading of the Qurʾān by the Qurʾān, and it stands on the same line as the fourth verse of the sūra.
And its content must be recorded: the answer neither refuses nor discusses the demand. They asked for punishment; Shuʿayb says "my Lord knows best what you do". He takes the matter away from himself, that is, and leaves it to knowledge and judgement.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is its overlap with Noah's answer: Noah too did not issue the judgement asked of him, but said in ḥisābuhum illā ʿalā rabbī (113). Both messengers end the dispute by saying that the judgement is not theirs.
| Verse | Who | Expression |
|---|---|---|
| 112-113 | Noah | Wa mā ʿilmī bimā kānū yaʿmalūn · in ḥisābuhum illā ʿalā rabbī |
| 188 | Shuʿayb | Rabbī aʿlamu bimā taʿmalūn |
Both sentences use the same roots (ع-ل-م and ع-م-ل). This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
And the difference must be recorded: Noah says "I have no knowledge", Shuʿayb says "my Lord knows better". Both draw the same limit, but from different sides.
The root ظ-ل-ل: shade. Ẓulla — a shade, a thing that covers over. The word is used in the Qurʾān both of a protecting shade (ẓulalun mina'n-nār — reversed at al-Zumar 39/16) and of cloud (ẓulalin mina'l-ghamām — al-Baqara 2/210).
And the Qurʾān does not explain what this punishment was. Yawmu'ẓ-ẓulla — "the day of the shadow" is said; what the shadow was is not.
In the reports a cloud, heat and fire are spoken of; these are not in the Qurʾān. I do not enter into a detail the Qurʾān does not give.
One — the word is a word that suggests protection. In a hot climate shade is what one takes refuge in. And the punishment is named with that word.
Two — a link can be made with the name of the people. Aṣḥābu'l-Ayka — "the people of the dense thicket". A thicket is the source of shade.
I record this link as my own reading, and it is not binding: the people are named as the people of a shaded place, and their punishment comes by way of a shade. That this is intended is not stated in the text; that the two words stand in the same sūra fifteen verses apart is a datum of the text. And it accords with the principle recorded in al-Burūj: the sentence is announced in the language of the offence or of the condition.
The construction occurs three times in the sūra (135, 156, 189), and all three are in three different accounts. This was tabulated in the section on 26/131-135.
And a point of word order must be recorded: in the first two occurrences the construction stood inside a warning (innī akhāfu ʿalaykum ʿadhāba yawmin ʿaẓīm; fa-yaʾkhudhakum ʿadhābu yawmin ʿaẓīm). In the third it stands inside a statement of fact: innahu kāna ʿadhāba yawmin ʿaẓīm.
| Verse | Who says it | Mood |
|---|---|---|
| 135 | Hūd | Fear — it has not yet happened |
| 156 | Ṣāliḥ | Condition — if it happens |
| 189 | The narrator | Statement — it happened |
This is an order that can be verified from the text: the same construction occurs three times, moving from warning to fulfilment.
The eighth and last seal of the sūra. The mould was treated at 26/8-9.
And an observation about position: the seal here closes not only the account of Shuʿayb but the whole seven-account sequence. The next verse will change the subject and turn to the one addressed: wa innahu la-tanzīlu rabbi'l-ʿālamīn (192).
And the construction rabbi'l-ʿālamīn must be recorded: five times in five accounts it was said "my wage falls only upon the Lord of all the worlds". In the hundred and ninety-second verse the same construction will be used of the source of the Qurʾān. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text, and it binds the two sections together.
وَإِنَّهُۥ لَتَنزِيلُ رَبِّ ٱلْعَٰلَمِينَ · نَزَلَ بِهِ ٱلرُّوحُ ٱلْأَمِينُ · عَلَىٰ قَلْبِكَ لِتَكُونَ مِنَ ٱلْمُنذِرِينَ · بِلِسَانٍ عَرَبِىٍّ مُّبِينٍ
Wa innahu la-tanzīlu rabbi'l-ʿālamīn · Nazala bihi'r-rūḥu'l-amīn · ʿAlā qalbika li-takūna mina'l-mundhirīn · Bi-lisānin ʿarabiyyin mubīn
"It is surely the sending down of the Lord of all the worlds. · The trustworthy Spirit brought it down — · upon your heart, that you might be one of the warners, · in a clear Arabic tongue."
| Verse | Element | Answers the question |
|---|---|---|
| 192 | La-tanzīlu rabbi'l-ʿālamīn | From whom? |
| 193 | Nazala bihi'r-rūḥu'l-amīn | Who brought it? |
| 194 | ʿAlā qalbika li-takūna mina'l-mundhirīn | Where and why? |
| 195 | Bi-lisānin ʿarabiyyin mubīn | In what language? |
The four verses thus give the chain of revelation from beginning to end: the source, the carrier, the destination, the purpose, the form.
I record this as an observation about the structure: through seven accounts the sūra recounted what the messengers said; now it recounts where this speech comes from.
The root ن-ز-ل: to descend. Form II (nazzala) announces gradual descent or intensification. Tanzīl is its verbal noun.
And a point of word order: the sentence does not say innahu munazzalun ("it has been sent down"); it says la-tanzīlu rabbi'l-ʿālamīn — "the sending down of the Lord of all the worlds". Not a passive participle, that is, but a verbal noun.
In Arabic making a verbal noun the predicate announces intensification: not "it is a thing sent down" but "it is the very act of sending down."
The same mould is the opening of several sūras of the Qurʾān: tanzīlu'l-kitābi mina'llāhi'l-ʿazīzi'l-ḥakīm (al-Zumar 39/1; al-Jāthiya 45/2; al-Aḥqāf 46/2 — treated in al-Aḥqāf), tanzīlan mimman khalaqa'l-arḍa (Ṭāhā 20/4), tanzīlu'l-ʿazīzi'r-raḥīm (Yā Sīn 36/5 — treated in Yāsīn).
And Yā Sīn 36/5 is worth recording: there the two names to which tanzīl is attributed are the same as the two names in the seal of al-Shuʿarāʾ — al-ʿAzīzu'r-Raḥīm. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
In Arabic nazala bi- means "to bring a thing down" ("to descend bringing it along"). The Spirit, that is, is recounted not as the party who sends the revelation but as the party who brings it.
Among the variant readings the reading nazzala bihi (Form II) is also transmitted; the difference of sense is not great.
Who is meant is not said in the verse; but the intra-Qurʾānic evidence is strong and was tabulated in al-Qadr and al-Nabaʾ. I rely on the note there:
| The expression in the Qurʾān | Place |
|---|---|
| Nazala bihi'r-rūḥu'l-amīn | Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/193 |
| Nazzalahu rūḥu'l-qudus | Al-Naḥl 16/102 |
| Fa-innahu nazzalahu ʿalā qalbika bi-idhni'llāh — the subject is Gabriel (Jibrīl) | Al-Baqara 2/97 |
Read together, the three verses yield three names doing the same work, and in the third the name is given openly: Gabriel. This is a chain that can be verified from the text; it was recorded in al-Qadr as the view "with the strongest intra-Qurʾānic evidence".
And the attribute amīn must be recorded. In the sūra five messengers had introduced themselves with this attribute: innī lakum rasūlun amīn (107, 125, 143, 162, 178).
| Who | Attribute | Verses |
|---|---|---|
| The five messengers | amīn | 107, 125, 143, 162, 178 |
| The one who brings the revelation | al-amīn | 193 |
The sūra thus uses the attribute of the carrier five times of human messengers and once of an angel. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
And as my own reading I record this: amāna is to deliver a thing as it is — neither taking away nor adding. This is the whole claim of the sūra: the speech has come from its source to the one addressed unchanged. And that both links in the chain are named with the same attribute carries that claim.
And the other side will be described at exactly this point in verse 223: yulqūna's-samʿa wa aktharuhum kādhibūn — "they lend an ear, and most of them are liars."
And a point of word order must be recorded: the place the revelation comes down to is said to be not "to you" but "to your heart".
The root ق-ل-ب was analysed in the fiftieth verse (munqalibūn): to turn a thing over; the thing that turns most from state to state.
| Explanation | Ground |
|---|---|
| The heart is the centre of grasping and memory | The Qurʾān attributes reasoning and understanding to the heart (lahum qulūbun lā yafqahūna bihā — al-Aʿrāf 7/179) |
| It is where the revelation is memorised and preserved | The same expression occurs at al-Baqara 2/97: nazzalahu ʿalā qalbika |
| The messenger carries the revelation not as an external object but within himself | The direct sense of the expression |
And a link within the sūra must be recorded: in the eighty-ninth verse the measure was the soundness of the heart (illā man ata'llāha bi-qalbin salīm). In the hundred and ninety-fourth verse the place the revelation comes down to is again the heart. This is a repetition that can be verified from the text.
And the mould must be recorded: not "that you might be a warner" but "that you might be one of the warners". The "assignment to a group" mould that occurs often in the sūra (tabulated at 26/29-31) is used here of the one addressed himself.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the sūra as a whole: through seven accounts seven warners were recounted. The hundred and ninety-fourth verse places the one addressed inside that series. And the sentence recorded at al-Aḥqāf 46/9 stands on the same line: qul mā kuntu bidʿan mina'r-rusul — "I am not the first of the messengers".
The root ع-ر-ب was analysed at al-Wāqiʿa 56/37 and I rely on that treatment. The description there: the core sense of the root is "to express clearly and plainly, to set out one's meaning without hiding it". Aʿraba ʿani'sh-shayʾ — he made a thing known plainly. Iʿrāb — bringing out into the open; the grammatical term iʿrāb also comes from here: a word's bringing out its function in the sentence through the vowel at its end.
And the same word was treated at al-Zukhruf 43/3 (innā jaʿalnāhu qurʾānan ʿarabiyyan laʿallakum taʿqilūn) and I rely on that treatment.
The two words come from the same semantic field: ʿarabī (clear) and mubīn (making clear). The construction thus stands as though it were a repetition.
| Explanation | Ground |
|---|---|
| ʿArabī is the name of the language, mubīn its attribute | The most widespread reading: "the Arabic tongue, which is clear" |
| Both look to clarity; there is emphasis | The sense of the root |
| Mubīn qualifies not the language but the Qurʾān | A remote reading |
And the five occurrences of the word in the sūra were tabulated in the section on 26/1-2. The sūra opens with al-kitābi'l-mubīn and here ties it to language with lisānin ʿarabiyyin mubīn. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
| Verse | Expression | Who / what |
|---|---|---|
| 13 | Wa lā yanṭaliqu lisānī | Moses — his tongue does not loosen |
| 84 | Wa'jʿal lī lisāna ṣidqin fi'l-ākhirīn | Abraham — a tongue of truth |
| 195 | Bi-lisānin ʿarabiyyin mubīn | The Qurʾān — the language it came down in |
Three occurrences, three different senses: the organ, being remembered, a language. This is a repetition that can be verified from the text. And as my own reading I record this: the sūra had recounted an account that opens with a tongue that does not loosen; it ends by defining itself as "a clear tongue". That this link is intended is not stated in the text.
وَإِنَّهُۥ لَفِى زُبُرِ ٱلْأَوَّلِينَ · أَوَلَمْ يَكُن لَّهُمْ ءَايَةً أَن يَعْلَمَهُۥ عُلَمَٰٓؤُا۟ بَنِىٓ إِسْرَٰٓءِيلَ · وَلَوْ نَزَّلْنَٰهُ عَلَىٰ بَعْضِ ٱلْأَعْجَمِينَ · فَقَرَأَهُۥ عَلَيْهِم مَّا كَانُوا۟ بِهِۦ مُؤْمِنِينَ
Wa innahu la-fī zuburi'l-awwalīn · A-wa lam yakun lahum āyatan an yaʿlamahu ʿulamāʾu banī Isrāʾīl · Wa law nazzalnāhu ʿalā baʿḍi'l-aʿjamīn · Fa-qaraʾahu ʿalayhim mā kānū bihi muʾminīn
"It is surely in the scriptures of those who came before. · Is it not a sign for them that the learned of the Children of Israel know it? · Had We sent it down upon one of the non-Arabic speakers · and had he recited it to them, they would still not have believed in it."
The root ز-ب-ر: the core the lexicographers give is to make firm, to build by laying stone upon stone (zabartu'l-biʾr — I lined the well with stone). And from there it passes to the sense of "to write": zabūr — what is written, a book. Zubur is its plural.
The link the lexicographers make is this: writing too is a kind of building — it is set out letter by letter, line by line, and made to last.
Across the series the root occurred at al-Qamar 54/43, 54/52 and at Fāṭir 35/25. Something recorded in Fāṭir attaches here: there three words were set in order — bayyināt (clear proofs), zubur (pages), al-kitābu'l-munīr (the illuminating Book) — and it was recorded that "what came is named both as spoken proof and as written document". I rely on that treatment.
| Reading | What the pronoun refers to | Its meaning |
|---|---|---|
| To the Qurʾān | The same pronoun as in wa innahu la-tanzīl (192) | "The news of this Book is in the earlier books" |
| To what the Qurʾān announces | To the content | "The truths it recounts are in the earlier ones too" |
Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. What is to be recorded is this: the sentence does not say "the same text is there". The expression fī zuburi'l-awwalīn — "it is in the scriptures of those who came before" — can cover both being present as it is and having been announced.
| Sense | Where |
|---|---|
| A miracle, a sign coming down from the sky | 4, 154 |
| An erected marker, a monument | 128 |
| A lesson, a proof | In the eight seals; 197 |
And what is presented as proof here must be recorded: not a miracle but a piece of knowledge. An yaʿlamahu ʿulamāʾu banī Isrāʾīl — "that the learned of the Children of Israel know it".
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the verse itself: those addressed were expecting a miracle of the kind recounted in the fourth verse. The verse points to a proof standing in front of them: the knowledge of the people of the Book who came before them.
And the same proof occurs at al-Aḥqāf 46/10: wa shahida shāhidun min banī Isrāʾīla ʿalā mithlihi fa-āmana wa'stakbartum — "and a witness from the Children of Israel testified to the like of it and believed, while you grew proud." It was treated there and I rely on that treatment.
And the frame recorded at al-Aḥqāf 46/4 attaches here: there two kinds of proof were asked for — observation (arūnī mādhā khalaqū) and transmission (iʾtūnī bi-kitābin min qabli hādhā aw athāratin min ʿilm). Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/196-197 offers a proof of the second kind.
A note on the variant readings: the readings āyatan (accusative) and āyatun (nominative) are transmitted for the verse; both come to the same meaning, only the subject and predicate of the sentence change places.
The root ع-ج-م: the core the lexicographers give is obscurity, unintelligibility — that is, the exact opposite of the root ع-ر-ب. ʿUjma — obscurity in speech; aʿjam — one who cannot set out his meaning plainly.
| Word | Its meaning |
|---|---|
| Aʿjamī | One who does not know Arabic, whose speech is not understood — an attribute of the person |
| ʿAjamī | Not an Arab — an attribute of lineage |
The al-aʿjamīn of the verse is in the first sense: those whose speech is not understood. The measure, that is, is not lineage but intelligibility.
This distinction must be recorded, because this is where a judgement would be built: the verse takes as its subject not a nation but a linguistic situation. This accords with the principle recorded in Method.
The same supposition is set up once more in the Qurʾān and was treated at Fuṣṣilat 41/44. I rely on that treatment.
Fuṣṣilat 41/44: wa law jaʿalnāhu qurʾānan aʿjamiyyan la-qālū law lā fuṣṣilat āyātuhu; a-aʿjamiyyun wa ʿarabiyyun — "Had We made it a Qurʾān in a foreign tongue they would certainly have said: 'Should its verses not have been made clear? A foreign tongue and an Arab?'"
The two verses set up the same supposition, but from different sides. The comparison is in the table:
| Fuṣṣilat 41/44 | Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/198-199 | |
|---|---|---|
| The supposition | Law jaʿalnāhu qurʾānan aʿjamiyyan | Law nazzalnāhu ʿalā baʿḍi'l-aʿjamīn |
| What changes | The language of the Book — if the text were foreign | The language of the messenger — if the carrier were foreign |
| The reaction of those addressed | La-qālū law lā fuṣṣilat āyātuh — they would object | Mā kānū bihi muʾminīn — they would still not believe |
| What it shows | That the objection is a pretext — whatever the language, an objection will be found | That the reason for not believing is not language |
| Mould | Condition + the words that would be said | Condition + the outcome |
Fuṣṣilat states in advance the objection of those addressed: "had it been in a foreign tongue they would have said 'it cannot be understood'." Al-Shuʿarāʾ does not even name the objection; it states the outcome directly: "they would still not believe."
The two verses come out at the same door by two different roads: one shows that the pretext changes its place, the other that the pretext does not change the outcome.
And something can be added here to what was recorded in Fuṣṣilat: in the supposition in al-Shuʿarāʾ what changes is not the Book but the person. ʿAlā baʿḍi'l-aʿjamīn — "upon one of the non-Arabic speakers". And the verb has been added too: fa-qaraʾahu ʿalayhim — "and had he recited it to them". The supposition contains the act of reciting as well: had the text come, had it been recited, they would still not have believed.
I record this as an observation about the structure: the verse carries the possibility to its very end and leaves the outcome the same at every stage.
The measure the two verses build together serves to test whether the grounds put forward in a dispute are the real reason. The test is simple: if the ground were removed, would the position change?
The verse makes this test by a supposition — if the language had been different, if the carrier had been different. And its answer is tied to the same place as the third verse of the sūra: the messenger's grief is needless, because the matter is not an inadequacy of expression.
كَذَٰلِكَ سَلَكْنَٰهُ فِى قُلُوبِ ٱلْمُجْرِمِينَ · لَا يُؤْمِنُونَ بِهِۦ حَتَّىٰ يَرَوُا۟ ٱلْعَذَابَ ٱلْأَلِيمَ · فَيَأْتِيَهُم بَغْتَةً وَهُمْ لَا يَشْعُرُونَ · فَيَقُولُوا۟ هَلْ نَحْنُ مُنظَرُونَ · أَفَبِعَذَابِنَا يَسْتَعْجِلُونَ · أَفَرَءَيْتَ إِن مَّتَّعْنَٰهُمْ سِنِينَ · ثُمَّ جَآءَهُم مَّا كَانُوا۟ يُوعَدُونَ · مَآ أَغْنَىٰ عَنْهُم مَّا كَانُوا۟ يُمَتَّعُونَ · وَمَآ أَهْلَكْنَا مِن قَرْيَةٍ إِلَّا لَهَا مُنذِرُونَ · ذِكْرَىٰ وَمَا كُنَّا ظَٰلِمِينَ
Kadhālika salaknāhu fī qulūbi'l-mujrimīn · Lā yuʾminūna bihi ḥattā yarawu'l-ʿadhāba'l-alīm · Fa-yaʾtiyahum baghtatan wa hum lā yashʿurūn · Fa-yaqūlū hal naḥnu munẓarūn · A-fa-bi-ʿadhābinā yastaʿjilūn · A-fa-raʾayta in mattaʿnāhum sinīn · Thumma jāʾahum mā kānū yūʿadūn · Mā aghnā ʿanhum mā kānū yumattaʿūn · Wa mā ahlaknā min qaryatin illā lahā mundhirūn · Dhikrā wa mā kunnā ẓālimīn
"Thus have We threaded it into the hearts of the guilty. · They will not believe in it until they see the painful punishment. · It will come upon them suddenly, and they will not be aware. · Then they will say: 'Are we to be given respite?' · Do they then seek to hasten Our punishment? · Tell me, then: if We let them enjoy themselves for years, · and then what they were promised came to them, · of what use to them would be what they were allowed to enjoy? · And We have destroyed no township that did not have its warners — · as a reminder. And We were never unjust."
The root س-ل-ك: to pass a thing through a way or a hole, to thread. Its concrete use: to pass a thread through the eye of a needle. The Qurʾān uses the same root in the form naslukuhu fī qulūbi'l-mujrimīn (al-Ḥijr 15/12) as well — almost the same sentence.
| Reading | The pronoun | Its meaning |
|---|---|---|
| To the Qurʾān | The same as the innahu pronouns in the preceding verses | "We threaded the Qurʾān into their hearts — yet they do not believe" |
| To the denial, the rejection | To the shared outcome of the preceding accounts | "We threaded this attitude into their hearts" |
Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. What is to be recorded is this: on the first reading the emphasis is that the speech has reached them but found no response; on the second, that the attitude is an outcome.
And the word kadhālika ("thus") must be recorded: the word attaches to the preceding verses. It comes, that is, after the supposition of verses 198-199 ("even if a foreigner recited it they would not believe"). This is a contextual datum that supports the first reading.
ٱلْمُجْرِمِين — the root was analysed in the ninety-ninth verse (ج-ر-م — to pluck fruit, and from there to earn guilt); I do not repeat it.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the link with 26/4: in the fourth verse it was said "if We willed We would send down a sign from heaven and their necks would bow". In the two hundred and first verse it is said that they will believe when they see the punishment. The two verses say the same thing: when a compelling sign comes, no resistance remains — but that belief is not what counts as belief.
And the Qurʾān says this openly elsewhere: fa-lam yaku yanfaʿuhum īmānuhum lammā raʾaw baʾsanā (al-Muʾmin 40/85 — treated in Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin)).
And the addition of wa hum lā yashʿurūn must be recorded: baghtatan already announces suddenness; on top of it "while they are not aware" is added. In Arabic this is reinforcement.
The root ش-ع-ر: to perceive what is fine and hidden. The root was mentioned in the hundred and thirteenth verse (law tashʿurūn) and will return by name in the final section of the sūra: al-shuʿarāʾ (224). This is a repetition that can be verified from the text, and the full analysis of the root will be made there.
I record an observation: the sense of the root is "to perceive". And in saying that the punishment comes unperceived, the verse uses this root. Twenty-four verses later the sūra will speak of a group that takes its name from the same root.
The root ن-ظ-ر: to look; and to wait, to grant a term. Inẓār — the granting of respite. Munẓar — a passive participle: one granted respite.
And the word must not be confused with mundhir (a warner — from the root ن-ذ-ر); they are two different roots. Both occur in the sūra: munẓarūn (203) and mundhirūn (208).
And a point of word order must be recorded: what is asked for is not an opportunity to believe but time.
| Verse | The demand | When |
|---|---|---|
| 203 | Hal naḥnu munẓarūn — "give us respite" | When the punishment comes |
| 204 | A-fa-bi-ʿadhābinā yastaʿjilūn — "they seek to hasten it" | Before the punishment |
The same people, at two different times, two opposite demands. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
And the demand of the people of al-Ayka attaches to this verse: fa-asqiṭ ʿalaynā kisafan mina's-samāʾ (187) — "drop a fragment of the sky". The sūra, that is, applies here to those addressed a scene it recounted twenty verses before.
The root ع-ج-ل: to hasten. Form X (istaʿjala) — to ask for haste, to demand that a thing be hastened.
After the hundred and ninety-fifth verse the sūra sets up a question to think on, and the question spreads across three verses (205-207).
| Verse | Element |
|---|---|
| 205 | Condition — "if We let them enjoy for years" |
| 206 | Second condition — "and then what was promised came" |
| 207 | Answer — "of what use would be what they enjoyed?" |
And the word sinīn (years) must be recorded: the term is set long. The question says not "if it lasts a short time" but "even if it lasts a long time".
The root م-ت-ع: to derive benefit from a thing, to enjoy it for a time. Matāʿ — a passing benefit, a provision. At the core of the word lies transience, and this was recorded in many sections of the series.
And the verb occurs twice: mattaʿnāhum (205), yumattaʿūn (207). The same root, one active and one passive.
And at al-Ṣāffāt 37/148 the same root closed an account: fa-mattaʿnāhum ilā ḥīn — "so We let them enjoy for a time". The same mould, in two sūras.
م-ا أَغْنَىٰ عَنْهُم — root غ-ن-ي: to be free of need, to suffice. Mā aghnā ʿanhu — "it warded nothing off from him, it did not suffice him".
And the mood of the sentence is perfect: mā aghnā. That the apodosis of a conditional comes in the perfect is exactly the technique recorded in the fourth verse: to recount as already done what is certain to happen.
A point of word order must be recorded: the sentence is built with the mā … illā mould — a rule without exception. And the min in min qaryatin, coming after a negative, announces comprehensiveness: "no township whatever".
And mundhirūn is plural. The singular (mundhirun) could also have been said. The transmitted explanation: that more than one warner may have come to each township, or that the class is meant.
And the word ties to the hundred and seventy-third verse: fa-sāʾa maṭaru'l-mundharīn — "the rain of those who were warned". The same root, two different voices: there those warned, here those who warn. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
And at Fāṭir 35/24 the same rule is set down with another word: wa in min ummatin illā khalā fīhā nadhīr — "there is no community in which a warner has not passed". It was treated there and I rely on that treatment.
A point of word order: the word stands alone and can be attached grammatically in several ways (as an object of purpose, mafʿūl lahu — "so that it be a reminder"; as a circumstantial — "as a reminder"). The sense does not change: the reason the warners are sent.
And the work of the sentence must be recorded: this is a note set upon all the accounts of destruction in the sūra. Through seven accounts peoples were destroyed. The two hundred and ninth verse says that this was not an injustice — and its ground is in the verse before it: warning had been given.
I record this as an observation about the structure: the two verses together build an argument. Punishment without warning would be an injustice; because warning was given, it is not.
وَمَا تَنَزَّلَتْ بِهِ ٱلشَّيَٰطِينُ · وَمَا يَنۢبَغِى لَهُمْ وَمَا يَسْتَطِيعُونَ · إِنَّهُمْ عَنِ ٱلسَّمْعِ لَمَعْزُولُونَ · فَلَا تَدْعُ مَعَ ٱللَّهِ إِلَٰهًا ءَاخَرَ فَتَكُونَ مِنَ ٱلْمُعَذَّبِينَ
Wa mā tanazzalat bihi'sh-shayāṭīn · Wa mā yanbaghī lahum wa mā yastaṭīʿūn · Innahum ʿani's-samʿi la-maʿzūlūn · Fa-lā tadʿu maʿa'llāhi ilāhan ākhara fa-takūna mina'l-muʿadhdhabīn
"The satans did not bring it down. · It is not for them to do, nor are they able. · For they are kept far from the hearing. · So do not call upon another god beside God, or you will be among those punished."
These three verses take up the second claim the sūra answers: "the satans are bringing this speech to him".
| Verse | Refutation | What it says |
|---|---|---|
| 210 | Mā tanazzalat bihi'sh-shayāṭīn | The fact — they did not bring it |
| 211a | Wa mā yanbaghī lahum | Fitness — it does not befit them, it is not their business |
| 211b | Wa mā yastaṭīʿūn | Power — they cannot do it |
| 212 | Innahum ʿani's-samʿi la-maʿzūlūn | The cause — they cannot reach the source |
The refutation descends, that is, from the fact to the cause: they did not bring it → they cannot bring it → because they cannot reach.
I record this as an observation about the structure: the sentence does not merely deny the claim; it gives the ground of its impossibility as well.
| Verse | Expression | Who |
|---|---|---|
| 210 | Wa mā tanazzalat bihi'sh-shayāṭīn | The satans — negated |
| 221 | ʿAlā man tanazzalu'sh-shayāṭīn | The satans — a question |
| 222 | Tanazzalu ʿalā kulli affākin athīm | The satans — the answer |
All three occurrences are of the satans. And the verb used of the revelation is different: nazala bihi'r-rūḥu'l-amīn (193) — Form I.
I record this as an observation: the sūra uses two different forms for two descents. And eleven verses lie between the two hundred and tenth and the two hundred and twenty-first — the sūra, that is, takes up the same subject twice, setting a section of commands between them.
The root ب-غ-ي: to seek, to want; and to overstep the bound. Form VII (inbaghā) — to be fitting and proper.
The transmitted explanation: the sentence carries both "it is not their business" and "it does not befit them". It stands, that is, between moral fitness and actual possibility. And the next clause closes off the possibility separately: wa mā yastaṭīʿūn.
And this subject was treated at al-Jinn 72/8-9, at al-Takwīr 81/25 and at al-Ṣāffāt 37/6-10, and I rely on those treatments. The notes there were, in summary, these: the Qurʾān records in several sūras that the sky is "guarded" and that those who attempt to listen are driven off; this verse is the counterpart of that note in al-Shuʿarāʾ.
And in al-Jinn al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/210-212 was already cited; I rely on the note there.
And the word al-samʿ must be recorded: "the hearing". The same root occurred in several places in the sūra: innā maʿakum mustamiʿūn (15), alā tastamiʿūn (25), hal yasmaʿūnakum (72). And here it is said that the hearing is blocked.
| Verse | Expression | Who hears / does not hear |
|---|---|---|
| 15 | Mustamiʿūn | God — listening |
| 25 | Alā tastamiʿūn | Pharaoh's listeners |
| 72 | Hal yasmaʿūnakum | The idols — they do not hear |
| 212 | ʿAni's-samʿi la-maʿzūlūn | The satans — they cannot reach |
| 223 | Yulqūna's-samʿa | Those who lend them an ear |
Five occurrences, one root. This is a repetition that can be verified from the text. And the sūra builds a line through who hears what.
And the verse is one of the most unexpected transitions in the sūra: the address turns directly to the messenger, and a prohibition is set.
| Explanation | Ground |
|---|---|
| The address is to the messenger, the intent is the community | A known style in Arabic; there are parallels in the Qurʾān (the sequence at al-Isrāʾ 17/22-39) |
| The command itself establishes the principle; the state of the addressee is another matter | The verse lays down a ruling; it is not claimed that the one addressed has broken it |
| To show that the limit holds for everyone | The note of punishment that follows (fa-takūna mina'l-muʿadhdhabīn) supports this |
I do not impose a preference. What is to be recorded is this: the verse sets down the exceptionlessness of the rule by exemplifying it at the highest station.
And the verb tadʿu must be recorded: the root د-ع-و — to call, to entreat. The same root occurred in Abraham's question in the seventy-second verse: hal yasmaʿūnakum idh tadʿūn. This is a repetition that can be verified from the text and binds the two sections: Abraham had asked his people "do they hear you when you call?"; here the one addressed is told "do not call upon another".
And the mina'l-muʿadhdhabīn mould must be recorded: one of the last instances of the "assignment to a group" mould that occurs often in the sūra (tabulated at 26/29-31). And in the hundred and thirty-eighth verse the people of ʿĀd had used the same word: wa mā naḥnu bi-muʿadhdhabīn — "we are not going to be punished". The same word, in two different mouths: one denies it, the other sets it down as a warning. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
وَأَنذِرْ عَشِيرَتَكَ ٱلْأَقْرَبِينَ · وَٱخْفِضْ جَنَاحَكَ لِمَنِ ٱتَّبَعَكَ مِنَ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ · فَإِنْ عَصَوْكَ فَقُلْ إِنِّى بَرِىٓءٌ مِّمَّا تَعْمَلُونَ · وَتَوَكَّلْ عَلَى ٱلْعَزِيزِ ٱلرَّحِيمِ · ٱلَّذِى يَرَىٰكَ حِينَ تَقُومُ · وَتَقَلُّبَكَ فِى ٱلسَّٰجِدِينَ · إِنَّهُۥ هُوَ ٱلسَّمِيعُ ٱلْعَلِيمُ
Wa andhir ʿashīrataka'l-aqrabīn · Wa'khfiḍ janāḥaka li-mani'ttabaʿaka mina'l-muʾminīn · Fa-in ʿaṣawka fa-qul innī barīʾun mimmā taʿmalūn · Wa tawakkal ʿala'l-ʿazīzi'r-raḥīm · Alladhī yarāka ḥīna taqūm · Wa taqallubaka fi's-sājidīn · Innahu huwa's-samīʿu'l-ʿalīm
"And warn your nearest kin. · And lower your wing to those of the believers who follow you. · And if they disobey you, say: 'I am quit of what you do.' · And put your trust in the Mighty, the Merciful — · who sees you when you rise, · and your turning about among those who prostrate. · He indeed is the Hearing, the Knowing."
| Order | Command | To whom / to what |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Andhir — warn | The nearest kin |
| 2 | Ikhfiḍ janāḥaka — lower your wing | The believers who follow |
| 3 | Fa-qul innī barīʾun — say "I am quit" | Those who disobey |
| 4 | Tawakkal — trust | God |
| — | 218-220 | The ground |
And the order is worth recording: warning → gentleness → separation → trust. Four commands for four different situations of one task.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the addressees of the four commands: three commands look to three different groups — those to be warned, those who follow, those who do not. The fourth looks to no group; it orders the messenger's own bearing.
The root ع-ش-ر: ten; and to live together, to mingle. ʿAshīra — the near community a person lives within, his kin. From the same root comes muʿāshara (living together).
The link the lexicographers make: the ʿashīra is the circle with which a person keeps muʿāshara, with whom he shares his daily life. It announces, that is, closeness rather than descent.
And the construction narrows twice over: ʿashīra is already the near circle; al-aqrabīn narrows it once more.
And the comparison recorded at al-Maʿārij 70/13 attaches here: there the word faṣīla was treated (wa faṣīlatihi'llatī tuʾwīh) and it was recorded that "al-Maʿārij's faṣīla announces a narrower circle". I rely on that treatment.
And the gradation recorded in al-Muddaththir attaches here. The note there was this: the addressee of the warning is determined in the Qurʾān by degrees. I repeat it in a table, because this verse is one link of that table:
| Verse | Addressee | Circle |
|---|---|---|
| Al-Muddaththir 74/2 | Qum fa-andhir — no limit | Indefinite |
| Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/214 | ʿAshīrataka'l-aqrabīn | The narrowest |
| Al-Anʿām 6/92; al-Shūrā 42/7 | Umma'l-qurā wa man ḥawlahā | The town and its surroundings |
| Sabaʾ 34/28 | Kāffatan li'n-nās | The widest |
And the discussion recorded at Nūḥ 71/8-9 attaches here: there the order in Noah's call (secret / open) was discussed and this verse was cited as the ground for the "from the narrow circle to the wide" reading. I rely on the note there; there too no firm preference was adopted.
I record an observation, and it accords with the principle of this commentary: the verse does not exempt the nearest circle; on the contrary it makes it the first addressee. Closeness, that is, is not an exemption from warning but the priority of the warning.
The root خ-ف-ض: to lower, to bring down, to soften. Its opposite is rafʿ (to raise). The Qurʾān uses the same root for lowering the voice as well (not wa'ghḍuḍ min ṣawtika, but in a similar field, Luqmān 31/19 — treated in Luqmān).
And the picture of the idiom is taken from the behaviour of birds: when a bird wishes to protect its young or its mate, it lowers its wing and takes it beneath. A wing raised is ready for flight; lowered, it is ready for protection.
The Qurʾān uses the same idiom once more: wa'khfiḍ lahumā janāḥa'dh-dhulli mina'r-raḥma (al-Isrāʾ 17/24) — toward parents, "lower to them the wing of humility out of mercy". The same verb, the same word.
Al-Qaṣaṣ 28/32: wa'ḍmum ilayka janāḥaka mina'r-rahb — "draw your wing to yourself against fear".
The note there was this: the word janāḥ used of a human being means "the arm, the side", and the lexicographers explain this idiom as a person's collecting himself, coming out of a shudder; they base it on the picture of a bird spreading its wings in alarm and gathering them when calm. And there this was transmitted as "a connection the lexicographers make".
| Al-Qaṣaṣ 28/32 | Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/215 | |
|---|---|---|
| Expression | Wa'ḍmum ilayka janāḥaka | Wa'khfiḍ janāḥaka li-man ittabaʿaka |
| Verb | ض-م-م — to draw to oneself, to gather | خ-ف-ض — to lower, to bring down |
| Direction | Ilayka — inward, toward oneself | Li-man — toward another |
| Cause | Mina'r-rahb — out of fear | Mina'l-muʾminīn — for those who follow |
| To whom | Moses | The messenger addressed |
| What it provides | Collecting oneself | Gentleness, protection |
The two idioms use the same word (janāḥ) but describe two different motions: one gathers the wing, the other lowers it.
And the difference stands in the prepositions: ilayka (toward yourself) and li-man ittabaʿaka (for those who follow).
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the direction of the two verbs: the motion in al-Qaṣaṣ is turned inward and quiets a fear; the motion in al-Shuʿarāʾ is turned outward and takes a community beneath it. Two verses use the same limb for two different needs. This is an explanation; it is not binding.
And an observation about the structure: the addressee of the command is limited. Li-mani'ttabaʿaka mina'l-muʾminīn — "to those of the believers who follow you". The command, that is, orders a bearing not toward everyone but toward a particular group. And the next verse gives a separate bearing for those who do not follow.
The root ب-ر-أ: to part from a thing, to come clear of it, to be free of it. From the same root: barāʾa (standing clear, severing connection) and barīʾ (clear, unconnected).
The clearing is not from the persons but from the acts. The verse does not say innī barīʾun minkum ("I am quit of you").
And this has the same structure as Lot's sentence in the hundred and sixty-eighth verse: innī li-ʿamalikum mina'l-qālīn — "I am one of those who detest what you do".
| Verse | Who | Expression | Object |
|---|---|---|---|
| 168 | Lot | Li-ʿamalikum mina'l-qālīn | ʿAmal |
| 216 | The messenger addressed | Barīʾun mimmā taʿmalūn | ʿAmal |
This is an overlap that can be verified from the text. And as my own reading I record this: the sūra sets up separation twice in the same form — from the act, not from the person. This is one of the plainest textual grounds for the principle recorded in Method.
And the change of pronoun must be recorded: the sentence begins fa-in ʿaṣawka (third person — "if they disobey you") and then continues mimmā taʿmalūn (second person — "what you do"). In Arabic this is called iltifāt (a shift in the direction of address).
The transmitted explanation: a declaration of separation is a word that must be said to the face; the address therefore passes from the third person to the second.
And the two hundred and seventeenth verse carries here the two names from the seal repeated eight times in the sūra.
| Place | Expression | Work |
|---|---|---|
| The seal (9, 68, 104, 122, 140, 159, 175, 191) | Wa inna rabbaka la-huwa'l-ʿazīzu'r-raḥīm | A statement — who He is |
| 217 | Wa tawakkal ʿala'l-ʿazīzi'r-raḥīm | A command — whom to trust |
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the sameness of the two constructions: through the sūra it had been said "your Lord is the Mighty, the Merciful". In the two hundred and seventeenth verse it is said "so put your trust in Him". Eight seals are tied to a single command.
The root و-ك-ل: to commit a matter to another, to appoint as agent. Form V (tawakkala) — to leave one's affair to someone.
| Expression | Reading 1 | Reading 2 |
|---|---|---|
| Ḥīna taqūm | When you rise for prayer | When you rise to any task, when you stand up |
| Taqallubaka fi's-sājidīn | Your turning between bowing and prostration in prayer | Your passing from state to state among those who prostrate, your moving among them |
I do not impose a preference. Both readings have a ground: the first rests on the word sājidīn suggesting prayer, the second on the general sense of the verbs qāma and taqallub.
ت-ق-ل-ب — root ق-ل-ب (analysed in the fiftieth verse: to turn over, to return). Form V (taqallaba): to turn about continually, to pass from state to state.
| Verse | Expression | Who |
|---|---|---|
| 50 | Innā ilā rabbinā munqalibūn | The sorcerers |
| 219 | Wa taqallubaka fi's-sājidīn | The messenger addressed |
| 227 | Ayya munqalabin yanqalibūn | Those who do wrong |
The same root, three different places: those who know the place of return, the one who turns about among those who prostrate, those who do not know the place of return. This is a repetition that can be verified from the text; what it means is interpretation.
And the five occurrences of the root samʿ in the sūra were tabulated in the section on 26/210-213. What is to be added here is this: in the two hundred and twelfth verse it was said that the satans are "kept far from the hearing"; in the two hundred and twentieth God is named "the Hearing". Eight verses apart, the same root, two different directions.
And the separating pronoun (huwa) must be recorded: innahu huwa's-samīʿu'l-ʿalīm. The same pronoun was present in the eight seals (la-huwa'l-ʿazīzu'r-raḥīm). As it draws toward its close, that is, the sūra repeats the grammar of the seal as well.
هَلْ أُنَبِّئُكُمْ عَلَىٰ مَن تَنَزَّلُ ٱلشَّيَٰطِينُ · تَنَزَّلُ عَلَىٰ كُلِّ أَفَّاكٍ أَثِيمٍ · يُلْقُونَ ٱلسَّمْعَ وَأَكْثَرُهُمْ كَٰذِبُونَ
Hal unabbiʾukum ʿalā man tanazzalu'sh-shayāṭīn · Tanazzalu ʿalā kulli affākin athīm · Yulqūna's-samʿa wa aktharuhum kādhibūn
"Shall I tell you upon whom the satans come down? · They come down upon every sinful fabricator. · They lend an ear; and most of them are liars."
هَلْ أُنَبِّئُكُمْ — "shall I tell you?" The mould is used in the Qurʾān to draw attention (hal unabbiʾukum bi-sharrin min dhālika — al-Māʾida 5/60; hal adullukum ʿalā tijāratin — al-Ṣaff 61/10, treated in al-Ṣaff).
And a point of word order must be recorded: the sūra takes up the claim a second time, and this time it changes direction.
| Verses | What it does |
|---|---|
| 210-212 | Negative — "the satans did not bring it down, they cannot" |
| 221-223 | Positive — "shall I tell you upon whom they do come down?" |
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the structure of the two sections: there are two ways of refuting a claim — to say "it is not so" and to say "the truth is thus". The sūra does both, setting a ten-verse section of commands between them.
The root was analysed at al-Jāthiya 45/7 and I rely on that treatment. The description there: أ-ف-ك — to turn a thing from its direction, to overturn it. And as was recorded there, the root was treated at al-Aḥqāf 46/11 and 46/28 as well (ifkun qadīm, ifkuhum).
| Sūra | Construction | Context |
|---|---|---|
| Al-Jāthiya 45/7 | Waylun li-kulli affākin athīm | One who hears the verses and grows proud |
| Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/222 | Tanazzalu ʿalā kulli affākin athīm | The one the satans come down upon |
The two constructions are exactly the same, and the word kulli is common to both. This is a datum that can be verified from the text.
And the continuation of the note in al-Jāthiya attaches here: there what the affāk does next was recounted (yasmaʿu āyāti'llāhi tutlā ʿalayhi thumma yuṣirru mustakbiran ka-an lam yasmaʿhā). In al-Shuʿarāʾ, what he receives is recounted.
أَثِيم — root أ-ث-م: the core the lexicographers give is to weigh down, to hold back — ithm is the act that keeps a person from good and leaves him behind. The faʿīl pattern: an assimilate adjective — settled, become a trait.
The description, that is, has two wings: what he says and what he does. And this is precisely the measure of the two hundred and twenty-sixth verse: wa annahum yaqūlūna mā lā yafʿalūn — the fit between what one says and what one does.
And the disputed point in the verse is this: to whom do the pronouns of yulqūna and aktharuhum refer?
| Reading | The pronoun | Its meaning |
|---|---|---|
| To the satans | Yulqūna's-samʿa — they strain to listen | "The satans lend an ear [to heaven]; and most of them are liars" |
| To those who deal with the affāks | Diviners / receivers of news | "They lend an ear [to the satans]; and most of them are liars" |
And the tension with the two hundred and twelfth verse must be recorded: there it was said innahum ʿani's-samʿi la-maʿzūlūn ("they are kept far from the hearing"). Here it says yulqūna's-samʿa ("they lend an ear").
The transmitted explanation: lending an ear (ilqāʾ al-samʿ) is an effort; being kept away is the outcome. That is, "they try to listen but cannot reach". This explanation reconciles the two verses and accords with the mould of the two hundred and twelfth verse — there the passive was used.
ألقى السمع — an idiom in Arabic: to give one's ear, to be all attention. The Qurʾān uses the same idiom once more: aw alqa's-samʿa wa huwa shahīd (Qāf 50/37 — treated in Qāf). The same idiom, in two different contexts.
And the verb alqā must be recorded: the root ل-ق-ي occurred six times in the sūra in the scene of the sorcerers (43-46; tabulated in the section on 26/43-49). The sūra, that is, uses the verb "to cast/to throw" in the scene of sorcery and in the discussion of the satans. This is a repetition that can be verified from the text.
And the word akthar (most) must be recorded: it is the same word as in the eight seals of the sūra — wa mā kāna aktharuhum muʾminīn.
| Place | Expression | Who |
|---|---|---|
| The eight seals | Wa mā kāna aktharuhum muʾminīn | The peoples |
| 223 | Wa aktharuhum kādhibūn | Those who lend an ear |
The same word, the same construction. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text. And in neither is "all of them" said.
وَٱلشُّعَرَآءُ يَتَّبِعُهُمُ ٱلْغَاوُۥنَ · أَلَمْ تَرَ أَنَّهُمْ فِى كُلِّ وَادٍ يَهِيمُونَ · وَأَنَّهُمْ يَقُولُونَ مَا لَا يَفْعَلُونَ
Wa'sh-shuʿarāʾu yattabiʿuhumu'l-ghāwūn · A-lam tara annahum fī kulli wādin yahīmūn · Wa annahum yaqūlūna mā lā yafʿalūn
"As for the poets, those gone astray follow them. · Do you not see that they wander bewildered in every valley · and that they say what they do not do?"
And the position of the section must be recorded: since the two hundred and twenty-first verse the sūra has taken the source of speech as its subject. First upon whom the satans come down (221-223), then the poets (224-226), then the exception (227).
I record this as an observation about the context: the section is not an independent "discussion of poetry" but the last link of an answer given to a claim. The claim the sūra answers was this: "this man is a poet, his speech is poetry." And the Qurʾān touches on this claim in many sūras — bal qālū aḍghāthu aḥlāmin bali'ftarāhu bal huwa shāʿir (al-Anbiyāʾ 21/5), wa mā huwa bi-qawli shāʿir (al-Ḥāqqa 69/41 — treated in al-Ḥāqqa), am yaqūlūna shāʿirun natarabbaṣu bihi rayba'l-manūn (al-Ṭūr 52/30 — treated in al-Ṭūr).
| Derivative | Its sense | Shared core |
|---|---|---|
| Shaʿara | He became aware, he sensed | Perceiving |
| Shuʿūr | Consciousness, awareness | Perceiving |
| Shaʿr | Hair | What is fine |
| Mashʿar | A sign, a mark; a place where a marker is set (al-mashʿari'l-ḥarām) | What makes one aware |
| Shāʿir | One who perceives fine things and says them | Perceiving |
| Shiʿr | Poetry | Fine speech |
By the sense of the root, then, a shāʿir is not "one who makes rhymes" but one who senses what is fine and says it. This is the dictionary value of the word, and it carries no negative sense.
| Verse | Expression | Context |
|---|---|---|
| 113 | Law tashʿurūn | Noah — "if only you understood" |
| 202 | Wa hum lā yashʿurūn | The punishment — without their being aware |
| 224 | Wa'sh-shuʿarāʾu | The poets |
The sūra, that is, has used the root from which it takes its name twice in the sense of "to perceive", and in the third place as the name of a group. This is a repetition that can be verified from the text.
The word order of the two hundred and twenty-fourth verse must be recorded, because the judgement comes out of it.
| Element | Word | Its work |
|---|---|---|
| Subject | Al-shuʿarāʾu | The poets |
| Predicate (a verbal clause) | Yattabiʿuhumu'l-ghāwūn | Those gone astray follow them |
The sentence, that is, gives no attribute directly about the poets. It does not say "poets are liars" or "poets are astray". What it says is who goes after them.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the construction of the sentence: the predicate is not about the poets themselves but about their followers. This also determines how the next two verses (225-226) are to be understood — because those two verses are attached by the pronoun annahum, and the referent of the pronoun is disputed.
The root was analysed in al-Najm, and its three occurrences in the sūra (91, 94, 224) were tabulated in the section on 26/90-95; I do not repeat it.
What is to be added here is this: the word occurs the first two times in the scene of the gathering in the account of Abraham, and the third time here. The sūra, that is, uses the word that names the side to whom the fire is shown, at the end, for a group of followers.
This is a repetition that can be verified from the text; what it means is interpretation, and two readings are possible:
| Reading | Its meaning |
|---|---|
| The word points to the same group | The ghāwūn at the gathering and those who follow the poets bear the same attribute |
| The word announces only the attribute | In both places the attribute "gone from the way" is meant; they need not be the same persons |
The root ه-ي-م was analysed at al-Wāqiʿa 56/55 and I rely on that treatment. The description there: hīm is the plural of ahyam/haymāʾ and means a camel afflicted with a disease that leaves it never satisfied by water. Huyām — a condition found in camels that makes the animal drink continually while its thirst never passes.
And what was recorded there was this: the work of the comparison is to give not a measure but a state — a thirst that does not pass with drinking.
| Sense | Ground |
|---|---|
| To roam loose from thirst | The root's core concerning camels |
| To walk aimlessly, bewildered | The widespread use |
| To be beside oneself in love | Hayamān — to lose one's reason in love |
The core shared by the three senses must be recorded: to move without being bound to a direction and without reaching satisfaction.
And the expression fī kulli wādin ("in every valley") must be recorded. و-د-ي — a valley: the hollow between two rises, a watercourse.
The explanation the lexicographers give: wādī is used in Arabic figuratively for "a subject, a field" as well. The English "to range over every subject" is close to it.
| Reading | Its meaning |
|---|---|
| Literal | To roam valley by valley — to be unsettled, to be loose |
| Figurative | To enter every subject — to stay nowhere, to have no consistent field |
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the picture the root of the word and the construction build together: what is criticised is not speaking but the speech's not being bound to a direction. The hīm camel is not one that does not drink — it drinks and is not satisfied. The matter, that is, is not inactivity but the absence of satisfaction and of direction.
And the same measure is set up once more in the Qurʾān, this time directly upon the believers. It was treated at al-Ṣaff 61/2-3 and I rely on that treatment.
Al-Ṣaff 61/2-3: yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū lima taqūlūna mā lā tafʿalūn · kabura maqtan ʿinda'llāhi an taqūlū mā lā tafʿalūn — "You who believe! Why do you say what you do not do? It is greatly hateful in the sight of God that you should say what you do not do."
| Al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/226 | Al-Ṣaff 61/2-3 | |
|---|---|---|
| About whom | The poets — third person | The believers — second person |
| Mood | Yaqūlūna — statement | Taqūlūna — question and reproach |
| Verb | Mā lā yafʿalūn | Mā lā tafʿalūn |
| Added ruling | none | Kabura maqtan ʿinda'llāh — "greatly hateful in the sight of God" |
| What it does | Description | Prohibition |
Al-Shuʿarāʾ describes a group by this attribute. Al-Ṣaff forbids the same attribute to the believers. The measure, that is, is not peculiar to one group. The fit between what one says and what one does is in al-Shuʿarāʾ a measure of description, in al-Ṣaff a command.
And this measure is set up within the sūra itself as well: five messengers said five times "I ask you no wage" (109, 127, 145, 164, 180) — and the sūra gives this not as a claim but as a record of conduct. And the attribute of the messengers was amīn (107, 125, 143, 162, 178): trustworthy, that is, one whose word and state hold together.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the sūra as a whole: from beginning to end the sūra separates the messenger and the other side by the same measure — the distance between speech and act. The two hundred and twenty-sixth verse names that measure.
And this is the most important grammatical question of the section: to whom does the pronoun annahum in the two hundred and twenty-fifth and twenty-sixth verses refer?
| Reading | The pronoun | Its meaning |
|---|---|---|
| To the poets | Al-shuʿarāʾ | "The poets wander in every valley and say what they do not do" |
| To those gone astray (the followers) | Al-ghāwūn | "Those who go after them wander in every valley and say what they do not do" |
The first reading is the widespread one, and the exception in the verse that follows (227) supports it: the exception is in the form illā'lladhīna āmanū, and it is understood to set apart a portion of the poets.
The second reading is also transmitted, and its ground is that the last word of the two hundred and twenty-fourth verse is al-ghāwūn — a pronoun refers to the nearest noun.
I do not impose a preference. What is to be recorded is this: whichever reading is taken, the two hundred and twenty-seventh verse sets an exception and prevents the description from being generalised to a whole group.
إِلَّا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ وَعَمِلُوا۟ ٱلصَّٰلِحَٰتِ وَذَكَرُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ كَثِيرًا وَٱنتَصَرُوا۟ مِنۢ بَعْدِ مَا ظُلِمُوا۟ ۗ وَسَيَعْلَمُ ٱلَّذِينَ ظَلَمُوٓا۟ أَىَّ مُنقَلَبٍ يَنقَلِبُونَ
Illā'lladhīna āmanū wa ʿamilu'ṣ-ṣāliḥāti wa dhakaru'llāha kathīran wa'ntaṣarū min baʿdi mā ẓulimū; wa sa-yaʿlamu'lladhīna ẓalamū ayya munqalabin yanqalibūn
"Except those who believe and do righteous deeds and remember God much and defend themselves after being wronged. Those who do wrong will soon know to what place of return they will return."
The three-verse description (224-226) is limited by this verse. And the limitation determines how the description is to be understood.
The first ground — the exception itself. If what were criticised were the art of poetry or being a poet, the exception would have come in the form "except those who give up composing poetry". It does not. The exception names four attributes, and none of the four has to do with poetry: faith, righteous deeds, much remembrance, defending oneself after being wronged. The distinction, that is, is built not on a trade or an art but on an attitude.
The second ground — the measure of verse 226. The attitude criticised is named: yaqūlūna mā lā yafʿalūn — not doing what one says. This is not a fault belonging to poetry; it can be found in every kind of speech. And at al-Ṣaff 61/2-3 the same fault is forbidden to the believers — and there is no poetry there.
The third ground — the word order of verse 224. As was recorded above, the predicate of the sentence is not an attribute about the poets but a piece of information about their followers. Yattabiʿuhumu'l-ghāwūn.
The fourth ground — the verb of verse 225. Yahīmūn — directionlessness. Directionlessness is a fault not in the form of the speech but in what the speech is bound to.
On these four grounds I record the following distinction, and I draw the limit of the verse plainly as well:
| What the verse says | What the verse does not say |
|---|---|
| An attitude is described: directionlessness and the mismatch of speech and act | "Poetry is bad" |
| Those who go after this attitude are ghāwūn | "Poets are unbelievers" |
| Poets who believe, do righteous deeds and defend themselves against wrong are outside this | "Art is forbidden" |
And no general ruling about poetry or art is issued in this commentary. The verse issues no ruling; it describes an attribute and plainly leaves outside it those who do not bear that attribute. This accords exactly with the principle recorded in Method: a judgement is not built wholesale upon a group; it is the attributes the verse describes, and whoever bears that attribute is included in it.
| Order | Attribute | Its field |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Āmanū | Faith |
| 2 | ʿAmilu'ṣ-ṣāliḥāt | Deed |
| 3 | Dhakaru'llāha kathīrā | Remembrance |
| 4 | Wa'ntaṣarū min baʿdi mā ẓulimū | Defence against wrong |
The first three are a triad that occurs often in the Qurʾān. The fourth is peculiar to this construction and deserves separate treatment.
And the setting of this attribute here must be recorded. I give it as my own reading: the fault described in the two hundred and twenty-fifth verse was directionlessness (fī kulli wādin yahīmūn). The counterpart of that is exactly remembrance: binding speech to a place. The word kathīran (much) also announces continuance. The third condition of the exception, that is, stands as the counterpart of the fault in the second verse. That this link is intended is not stated in the text.
The root ن-ص-ر was analysed in the ninety-third verse, and it was recorded that Form VIII (intaṣara) adds reflexivity: to defend oneself, to take one's own right.
| Verse | Expression | Who | Outcome |
|---|---|---|---|
| 93 | Aw yantaṣirūn | The idols | They cannot |
| 227 | Wa'ntaṣarū min baʿdi mā ẓulimū | Those who believe | They do |
The same form, the same root, two different sides. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text, and it binds the two ends of the sūra.
One — the defence comes afterwards. Min baʿdi mā ẓulimū — "after being wronged". The sentence, that is, describes not striking first but answering.
Two — the verb is passive: ẓulimū — "they were wronged". Who did the wrong is not said; the subject is the side to whom the wrong was done.
And this field was treated in al-Shūrā and I rely on that treatment. There the same root occurs: wa'lladhīna idhā aṣābahumu'l-baghyu hum yantaṣirūn (al-Shūrā 42/39), and immediately after a limit is set: wa jazāʾu sayyiʾatin sayyiʾatun mithluhā (42/40) — that the requital be equal to the like of it. I rely on the note there and do not repeat it here.
What is to be recorded is this: al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/227 counts defence as an attribute; al-Shūrā 42/40 gives its measure.
And a note on the time of this verse's revelation: as was stated in the introductory section of the sūra, some sources transmit that the final verses are Medinan, and this very expression is given as the ground. I adopt no firm preference.
In the third verse the messenger had been told "you are almost destroying yourself because they will not believe". In the two hundred and twenty-seventh verse it is said to whom the outcome belongs: wa sa-yaʿlamu… — "they will soon know".
سَ (sīn) — the near future. And in the sixth verse of the sūra the same particle did the same work: fa-sa-yaʾtīhim anbāʾu mā kānū bihi yastahziʾūn.
| Verse | Expression | Position |
|---|---|---|
| 6 | Fa-sa-yaʾtīhim anbāʾu… | At the beginning of the sūra |
| 227 | Wa sa-yaʿlamu'lladhīna ẓalamū… | At the end of the sūra |
The two verses announce the same thing with the same particle: the outcome is deferred but not distant. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
The root was analysed in al-Inshiqāq, and this verse was already cited there; I rely on that treatment. The note there: ق-ل-ب — to turn over; inqalaba means both "to return" and "to arrive at one's end", and the Qurʾān uses this verse in the second sense.
What is to be added here is the repetition within the sūra. The root occurs three times in the sūra, and all three were tabulated (in the section on 26/214-220). Here is the third and last occurrence.
And the word order itself must be recorded: there is a cognate accusative, qualified by an interrogative.
| Element | Word | Its work |
|---|---|---|
| Interrogative adjective | Ayya | "Which" |
| Cognate accusative | Munqalaban | A place of return / a returning |
| Verb | Yanqalibūn | They will return |
The sentence, that is, does not say "where will they go"; it says "with what returning will they return". And munqalab in Arabic can be both a place of return (a noun of place) and a returning (a verbal noun). Both readings are transmitted.
And the word order of the sentence leaves a threat open: what the place of return is is not said. It is only said that "they will know".
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is its link with the fourth verse of the sūra: the sūra had begun "if We willed We would send down a sign from heaven", and it did not send it down. At the end too it does not state the content of the threat. The sūra closes, that is, where it opened: information is not given, the coming of the information is announced.
The four verses from the two hundred and twenty-fourth to the two hundred and twenty-seventh set up a measure for how a field of speech is to be assessed, and the measure does not look to the kind of art.
| Question | Its counterpart in the verse |
|---|---|
| Is the speech bound to a direction, or flung in every direction? | Fī kulli wādin yahīmūn |
| Does the speaker do what he says? | Yaqūlūna mā lā yafʿalūn |
| Who goes after him? | Yattabiʿuhumu'l-ghāwūn |
And these three questions look today to a field far beyond poetry: every kind of production of speech — writing, speaking, the platform, the performance, every kind of public expression. The verse describes not a craft but a responsibility.
And the exception establishes the justice of the measure: one who does the same work does not fall under the same judgement if he does not bear the same attributes. This is the method the sūra applies from beginning to end — seven peoples were recounted not by their names but by what they did; and in the eight seals it was not "all" but "most" that was said.
In two hundred and twenty-seven verses al-Shuʿarāʾ does one thing: it recounts the same event seven times and ends each time with the same sentence.
This is not a literary choice but a form of proof. The sūra does not prove a claim; it shows a pattern. And the method by which the pattern is shown is the sūra itself: repetition.
In the third verse the sūra observes a condition: the messenger is consuming himself because those he addresses do not believe. And the rest of the sūra gives three separate answers to this condition:
| Answer | Where | What it says |
|---|---|---|
| Compulsion was possible; it was not chosen | 4 | The outcome is not a matter standing at the limit of power |
| Those before you received the same answer | 10-191 | Seven accounts, seven times the same outcome |
| The matter is not an inadequacy of expression | 192-199 | Had the language changed, had the carrier changed, the outcome would not have changed |
And what the three answers have in common is this: not one of them tells the messenger "work harder". All three say the same thing: the outcome is not your business.
The most easily verifiable datum of the sūra is the two-verse seal repeated exactly eight times (8-9, 67-68, 103-104, 121-122, 139-140, 158-159, 174-175, 190-191).
| Verse | Expression | Its work |
|---|---|---|
| The first | Inna fī dhālika la-āyatan wa mā kāna aktharuhum muʾminīn | The fact — there was a sign, most did not believe |
| The second | Wa inna rabbaka la-huwa'l-ʿazīzu'r-raḥīm | The measure — the outcome is tied to two names |
And in the two hundred and seventeenth verse these two names are tied to a command: wa tawakkal ʿala'l-ʿazīzi'r-raḥīm.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is that eight repetitions and one command use the same construction: eight times the sūra announces an attribute, and at the end it makes that attribute the ground of a bearing. The seal, then, is not a closing formula; it is the preparation for the command to be given at the end of the sūra.
From beginning to end the sūra uses a single measure, and in the two hundred and twenty-sixth verse it names that measure: yaqūlūna mā lā yafʿalūn.
| Who | Speech | Act | Fit |
|---|---|---|---|
| The five messengers | Innī lakum rasūlun amīn | Mā asʾalukum ʿalayhi min ajr (5 times) | Present |
| Pharaoh | Ilāhan ghayrī (29) | Fa-mādhā taʾmurūn (35) | Absent |
| The sorcerers (before) | Innā la-naḥnu'l-ghālibūn (44) | They were defeated (45) | Absent |
| The sorcerers (after) | Lā ḍayra (50) | They turned in spite of the threat | Present |
| ʿĀd | Wa mā naḥnu bi-muʿadhdhabīn (138) | Fa-ahlaknāhum (139) | Absent |
| Abraham | The five-sentence sequence (78-82) | He parted from his people (77) | Present |
| The section on the poets | Yaqūlūna mā lā yafʿalūn (226) | — | Absent |
The sūra, that is, separates the parties not by their beliefs but by the distance between their speech and their acts. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
| The opening (1-9) | The closing (221-227) | |
|---|---|---|
| Subject | The Book itself | The things that are not the source of the Book |
| To the messenger | Laʿallaka bākhiʿun nafsak (3) | Wa tawakkal (217) |
| Time | Fa-sa-yaʾtīhim (6) | Wa sa-yaʿlamu (227) |
| Information | Not given — "the tidings will come" | Not given — "which return, they will know" |
| The seal | 8-9 — the first stamping | Absent — the sūra ends unsealed |
I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the seal was set after something that closes — a proof, seven accounts. The final section of the sūra, however, does not close: its last sentence is left to a future (wa sa-yaʿlamu). The absence of the seal accords with that waiting. This is an explanation, not a ruling.
The table below is a list of the roots analysed here for the first time or treated in reliance on other sections of the series.
| Root | Word | First time in this section? | Section relied on |
|---|---|---|---|
| ب-خ-ع | bākhiʿ (3) | Yes | — |
| ب-خ-س | tabkhasū (183) | No | al-Muṭaffifīn |
| ب-ط-ش | baṭashtum (130) | No | al-Burūj, al-Qamar |
| ه-ي-م | yahīmūn (225) | No | al-Wāqiʿa |
| أ-ف-ك | yaʾfikūn (45), affāk (222) | No | al-Jāthiya, al-Aḥqāf |
| ع-ر-ب | ʿarabiyy (195) | No | al-Wāqiʿa, al-Zukhruf |
| ش-ع-ر | shuʿarāʾ (224) | Yes (full analysis) | — |
| ر-ي-ع | rīʿ (128) | Yes | — |
| ص-ن-ع | maṣāniʿ (129) | Yes | — |
| ش-ر-ذ-م | shirdhima (54) | Yes | — |
| ض-ي-ر | ḍayr (50) | Yes | — |
| ك-ب-ك-ب | kubkibū (94) | Yes | — |
| ق-ل-ي | qālīn (168) | Yes | al-Ḍuḥā (another derivative) |
| ج-ب-ل | jibilla (184) | Yes | — |
| ف-ر-ه | fārihīn (149) | Yes | — |
| ه-ض-م | haḍīm (148) | Yes | — |
| ع-ث-و | taʿthaw (183) | Yes | — |
| ع-ج-م | aʿjamīn (198) | No | Fuṣṣilat |
| ق-ل-ب | munqalibūn (50, 227) | No | al-Inshiqāq |
| ج-ن-ح | janāḥ (215) | No | al-Qaṣaṣ |
| Section | For what |
|---|---|
| al-Ṣāffāt | The sequence of prophets and the technique of the closing seal; qalb salīm; dammarna'l-ākharīn |
| al-Qaṣaṣ | The background of the account of Moses; istiḍʿāf; the idiom of janāḥ; the table of the limit drawn for the messenger |
| Fuṣṣilat | 41/44 — the supposition of "a Qurʾān in a foreign tongue" |
| al-Ṣaff | 61/2-3 — not doing what one says |
| al-Wāqiʿa | The roots ع-ر-ب and ه-ي-م |
| al-Muṭaffifīn | The field of measure and weight; the root ب-خ-س |
| al-Burūj | The root ب-ط-ش; the principle "the sentence is announced in the language of the offence" |
| al-Zukhruf, Luqmān | The proof from the forefathers |
| al-Aḥqāf, Fāṭir | The "do they hear?" proof; the two-stage refutation |
| al-Jāthiya | affāk athīm |
| al-Ḥadīd | Mīzān — the Book, the measure, iron |
| al-Fajr, al-Qamar, al-Ḥāqqa | The place of ʿĀd and Thamūd within the Qurʾān |
| Nūḥ | Noah's call and his prayer |
| al-Qadr, al-Nabaʾ | Who al-rūḥ al-amīn is |
| al-Najm | The root غ-و-ي and ghāwūn |
| al-Shūrā | The measure of defence against wrong |
| al-Taḥrīm | Lot's wife — that closeness does not save |
The last sentence of the sūra gives no information: "they will soon know to what place of return they will return." The information is deferred, but the deferral is not indefinite — the letter sīn announces the near future.
And between the first sentence and the last sentence of the sūra lie two hundred and twenty-five verses; both do the same thing: they announce that something is coming and do not say what it is.
Everything in between — seven prophets, eight seals, three sentences repeated five times, the sorcerers whose side changed in two minutes, houses carved out of mountains, the measure and the balance, and the measure of speech and act in the last three verses — is set between these two announcements.